Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Banks - Diversified / NatWest Group

NatWest Group

nwg · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker nwg
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Banks - Diversified
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · NatWest Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
NORTHUMBRIAN WATER LIMITED 
ANNUAL REPORT AND 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

Registered company no: 02366703

2

ANNUAL REPORT AND 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 
31 MARCH 2020

CONTENTS  

PAGE

STRATEGIC REPORT

Chairman’s statement

Chief Executive Officer’s review

Business overview

Section 172 Statement

Performance review

Financial performance and structure

Risk report 

GOVERNANCE REPORT

Chairman’s introduction

Senior Independent Non-Executive Director’s report

Corporate governance

Remuneration Committee report

Directors’ report

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Income statement

Statement of comprehensive income

Balance sheet

Statement of changes in equity

Cash flow statement

Notes to the Financial Statements

Independent auditor’s report to the members of Northumbrian Water Limited

3

4

6

10

19

21

54

57

64

65

67

69

88

100

105 

106 

107 

108 

109 

110 

111 

142

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

3

STRATEGIC 
REPORT

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT

STRATEGIC REPORT 

4

Our strong performance is underpinned by our 
five strategic themes: Customer, Environment, 
Competitiveness, People and Communities. At 
each meeting the Board has reviewed 
performance against a balanced scorecard of 
measures related to these strategic themes in 
addition to health and safety, financial 
performance and other key factors. A more 
detailed overview of our work and  
progress on these themes is set out later in this 
Strategic Report.

Our Chief Executive Officer (CEO), Heidi Mottram, 
describes in her Review our continued strong 
performance delivered against existing 
commitments but, importantly, we have also tried 
to lay solid foundations for the coming years in 
our 2020-25 Business Plan (our Plan). 

We submitted our Plan in August 2018. This was a 
very collaborative and consultative exercise, 
conducted in partnership with our customers and 
other key stakeholders and we were encouraged 
by the very positive response our Plan received, 
including 91% customer support. Our Plan 
committed to offering significant bill reductions 
to our customers alongside real improvements in 
service. It was clear from our detailed and 
extensive work with customers that they shared 
our firm belief that protecting the environment 
and ensuring the resilience of our services should 
remain two of our key priorities. We were 
confident that our Business Plan would have 
enabled us to deliver on those fronts in a cost 
effective manner, as we evidenced to Ofwat, and 
as supported by detailed analysis confirming that 
the investment we proposed is in our customers’ 
best interests for the long term. Contrary to our 
customers’ wishes, in its Final Determination of 
prices for 2020–25 (FD), Ofwat rejected several 
key elements of our Plan, including critical 
projects to enhance resilience and reduce sewer 
flooding.

The Board assessed the FD in detail, in the 
context of the complex environment in which 
NWL operates, and the varied risks to which it is 
exposed, which are often difficult to forecast 
accurately. Although the Board considers that the 
Company remains financially viable in the short 
term, it unanimously agreed that the FD does not 
enable NWL to maintain the sustainable financial 
resilience required to ensure that it can continue 
over the longer term to provide the reliable and 
high quality services that our customers need 
and rightly expect of us. 

A J Hunter

The Board of 
Northumbrian Water 
Limited (NWL/the 
Company) recognises 
that, for most of our 
customers, we are the 
only available supplier 
of water. 

The Company therefore carries very significant 
responsibilities and must strive to meet the high 
expectations of everyone we serve and work 
with. As a result, the Board challenges itself and 
the Company’s employees, to deliver improved 
performance each year, so that our customers’ 
high expectations can continue to be met. Our 
Company’s vision, however, remains the same 
– to be the national leader in the provision of 
sustainable water and wastewater services.

It is a primary duty of the Board to balance the 
interests of all our stakeholders fairly, whilst 
meeting our fiduciary duties as directors. As 
Chairman, I believe the Board strikes the required 
balance very well, assisted by the robust 
governance arrangements we have in place, 
which are set out in detail in our Corporate 
Governance report.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

5

Therefore, as a measure of last resort, on 14 
February 2020, the Company rejected the FD and 
asked Ofwat to refer it for redetermination by the 
Competition and Markets Authority (CMA). This 
process is underway as I write this statement and 
we expect to know the outcome no later than 
March 2021.

Notwithstanding the CMA appeal, it is our people 
that are our ‘front-line’ and NWL’s performance 
depends entirely on their continued engagement, 
initiative and hard work. I would like to sincerely 
thank all our employees for their dedication and 
commitment this year, and in particular given the 
tremendous challenges posed by Covid-19. 

Finally, I would like to welcome Mike Porter, who 
joined us on 29 June 2020 as Chief Financial 
Officer, and express the Board’s appreciation for 
the valuable contributions made by Frank Frame 
as a Non-Executive Director (NED) between 2011 
and 2019 and Chris Johns as Finance Director 
between 2013 and 2020. Frank retired from the 
Board at the end of 2019 and Chris stepped down 
in May this year. We wish them both well for the 
future.

I hope you find our Annual Report and Financial 
Statements interesting and helpful.

A J Hunter 
Chairman

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

6

CHIEF EXECUTIVE 
OFFICER’S REVIEW

Our vision is to be the national leader in the provision 
of sustainable water and wastewater services, and 
I am delighted that we have made further progress 
towards this vision during 2019/20, and remain one of 
the leaders in our industry.

to share vital information and a variety of online 
tools to bring our people together. Guides such as 
the Health & Wellbeing Guide were delivered in 
interactive formats to encourage employee take 
up.

We understand how difficult this time has been 
for many of our customers and we built on our 
existing ‘Water without the Worry’ campaign 
through direct communications to customers. We 
were able to offer payment breaks to over 6,000 
customers and apply our social tariffs to 2,000 
customers with affordability issues. We also 
signed up 4,000 extra customers to our Priority 
Services Register to reflect their circumstances. 
We have built on other customer messages such 
as ‘Bin The Wipe’ to reinforce that, even during 
toilet roll shortages, other materials should not be 
flushed down the toilet.

Our purpose is not only to deliver this essential 
service for customers, but also to make a wider 
contribution to support our communities and 
enhance the environment we all depend on. The 
impact of the pandemic has brought this 
responsibility into even sharper focus. 
Recognising this we were one of the first 
businesses to sign the ‘C-19 Business Pledge’ (see 
page 7). This pledge commits us to supporting our 
customers, employees and communities as our 
part in helping the country pull through the 
Covid-19 crisis.

We chose as a business not to furlough any staff, 
with those who could not carry on their normal 
work either trained to support other parts of the 
business or given the opportunity to help others 
in our communities. This included delivering 
essential food and prescriptions, and making 
welfare phone calls to vulnerable, isolated people.

The Covid-19 situation is not over yet and we will 
continue to respond to government guidance as it 
develops and ensure that we keep delivering our 
key services safely, and look after our employees, 
customers and communities.

H Mottram

But before I review some of the achievements we 
are most proud of this year and look forward to 
the year ahead, I would like to talk about the 
impact of the current Covid-19 pandemic and 
how we have responded to the many challenges 
it has created.

COVID-19

During this time the vital importance of 
delivering clean water and safely taking away 
wastewater has perhaps never been so clear. I am 
incredibly proud of how our teams and partners 
have come together to continue to provide our 
customers with this essential public service in 
the face of the pandemic.

Keeping our employees safe was our first priority, 
and we were able to quickly enable our customer 
and support teams to work from home, in line 
with government guidance, as well as taking 
measures to ensure that our operational and field 
workers could continue to carry out their 
essential work safely. We utilised multiple 
communication channels to keep our people 
informed and engaged, using daily email updates 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

7

OUR C-19 PLEDGE

Making OVER £1,000,000 of support available during 
the COVID-19 pandemic

This matches our commitment as one of the first signatories of the C-19 Business Pledge

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

8

Innovate East event with Anglian Water. I am 
delighted to see ideas from our earlier events 
coming through into practical use within our 
business, such as our Digital Twin to help us 
better understand our customers’ experience of 
our services. We have also gone global this year, 
launching our Amplify platform and opening up 
real life challenges for people around the world to 
work on solutions.

The common theme running through all of these 
achievements is that they are the result of the 
hard work that our people put in every single day. 
Through our Great Place To Work (GPTW) strategy 
we aspire for all of our people to have a great 
experience at work, to understand the part they 
play to achieve our vision and to deliver an 
unrivalled customer experience. We were 
delighted to be recognised as the top place to 
work in our northern operating region at the 
North East Best Places to Work awards.

OUR PERFORMANCE IN 2019/20

We have been through a major transformation 
programme in our customer teams over the past 
few years. This year we followed the 
implementation of our new customer contact and 
billing system with our new operational contact 
and planning system and, at the same time, we’ve 
launched our new digital platforms. As with any 
major change programme this has required a 
huge amount of effort and learning from our 
people and I would like to personally thank the 
project and business teams for their tremendous 
efforts.

These systems give us a much improved platform 
to engage with our customers in the way they 
choose, but our most important asset in providing 
unrivalled customer experience is our people. 
With our Just Add You approach, we’re taking 
best practice approaches and tailoring them to 
deliver what our customers have told us are their 
top priorities. I believe this sets us up well to 
deliver against, the new more holistic measure of 
customer experience (C-MeX).

We made steady improvements across almost all 
of our targets in our water business, meeting our 
leakage targets again in both of our operating 
regions and continuing long term improvements 
in reducing contacts related to the appearance 
and smell of our water. We have continued to lead 
the way on water efficiency adding our ‘Leaky 
Loos’ campaign to our existing ‘Every Drop 
Counts’ message.  

While we continued our strong environmental 
performance, we have continued to focus on 
sewer flooding, which is one of the worst service 
failures our customers can experience. Our Bin 
the Wipe campaign is aimed at changing 
customer behaviour to avoid blockages and I have 
been really impressed by some of the early 
results where we have targeted three hot spot 
areas with different innovative approaches. We 
will look to build on this over the coming year.

I was pleased to have the opportunity to speak at 
Water UK’s Delivering a Zero Carbon Water Sector 
conference earlier this year. Our business is 
embedded in the environment and it is 
something we, as an industry, care about 
passionately. We met our previous target to 
reduce greenhouse gas emissions by 2020 by a 
considerable margin, through our investment in 
generating energy from sewage sludge and 
commitment to sourcing renewable energy. We 
have now set ourselves a really challenging 
target of being net zero carbon by 2027, but I’m 
very pleased with the real progress we are 
making.

Innovation remains key to improving our long 
term performance. We hosted our third 
Innovation Festival in 2019, and also held a joint 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

9

LOOKING FORWARD

We are now entering the next five year cycle of our sector. I am still extremely proud of Our Plan, the 
engagement we had with over 400,000 customers in developing it, and of the ambitious goals and 
significant bill reductions we set out as a result. However, our Board decided unanimously that Ofwat’s 
FD did not adequately reflect what our customers said were their priorities and we asked Ofwat to 
refer its FD to the CMA.

This will not distract us from our focus which remains, as always, on our customers and continuing to 
deliver an unrivalled service for them. Our goals are ambitious and so we need to push on and put our 
efforts firmly on delivering against the outcomes which our customers told us were so important to 
them, which are set out on page 16 of this report.

We know we are building on strong foundations in many areas, such as leakage and our 
environmental performance, where we have been performing strongly for a number of years. Equally 
we know we have to improve our performance across other areas such as water quality and sewer 
flooding in order to meet our stretching Performance Commitments (PCs) and industry-leading 
ambitions, but our plans are already underway.

We are proud of the improvements we have made over the past five years, but we are never 
complacent and are focused on delivering the ambitious goals we’ve set for the next five years and 
beyond. I hope you find our Annual Report and Financial Statements helpful and informative.

H Mottram CBE
CEO

This Annual Report and Financial Statements is just one of a suite of documents we have published 
to provide our stakeholders with easily accessible information on our performance and governance. 
We have also published:

Annual Performance Report: setting out how we have performed against the commitments we 
made in our Business Plan for 2015-20 and how we are continually striving to improve the services 
we deliver to our customers and our business Outcomes. There is also an accessible summary 
version.

Our Contribution Report: presenting the social, environmental and economic impact we have on 
the communities we serve.

Data Assurance Summary: explaining how we ensure that the information we report is accurate, 
clear and transparent and deliver against the commitments in Our Assurance Plan.

All of these documents are available on our websites at.www.nwg.co.uk.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

10

BUSINESS OVERVIEW 

Our vision is to be the national leader in sustainable 
water and wastewater services.

We provide water and wastewater services to our customers in the north east of England, trading as 
Northumbrian Water (NW), and water services only to our customers in the south east of England, 
trading as Essex & Suffolk Water (ESW).

We employ over 3,000 people

NW supplies water and wastewater services to 
2.7 million people in the major population 
centres of Tyneside, Wearside and Teesside as 
well as the large rural areas of Northumberland 
and County Durham.  We provide wastewater 
services only in Hartlepool.

ESW supplies water services to 
1.6 million people in Essex and 
0.3 million in Suffolk. Our Essex 
area is part rural and part urban 
and includes the main population 
centres of Chelmsford, Southend 
and the London Boroughs of 
Barking and Dagenham and 
Havering and Redbridge.  Our 
Suffolk area is mainly rural with 
the largest towns being Great 
Yarmouth and Lowestoft.

We operate and maintain:

 • 53 water treatment works;

 • 394 water pumping stations;

 • 341 water service reservoirs;

 • 26,200km of water mains;

 • 410 sewage treatment works;

 • 1,007 sewage pumping stations; 

and

 • 30,106km of sewers.

NWL is part of the Northumbrian Water Group (NWG or the Group). Further information about the 
structure and ownership of NWG is provided on page 54 of this report.

Every day we supply 1.1 billion litres of water

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

11

RATED TOP WATER & 
SEWERAGE COMPANY 
BY CCWATER

Top water and sewerage 
company in first CCWater 
Water Mark assessment

ONE OF WORLD’S 
MOST ETHICAL 
COMPANIES

Only water and wastewater 
company in the world on 
Ethisphere list

EMPLOYER OF THE 
YEAR

2019 North East Business 
Women of the Year Awards.

BEST PLACE TO 
WORK IN THE 
NORTH EAST

Number 1 in the Top 50 
places to work at the North 
East Best Places to Work 
awards.

OUR HIGHLIGHTS

SUPPORTING 
CUSTOMERS THROUGH 
COVID-19 

Kept essential services running 
and supported customers in 
difficult circumstances

THINK DIGITAL

New customer websites 
launched during the year

THIRD INNOVATION 
FESTIVAL PLUS 
INNOVATE EAST

Industry leading approach 
to Innovation and first joint 
event with Anglian Water

100% OF SEWAGE 
SLUDGE CONVERTED 
TO RENEWABLE 
ENERGY

Benefitting customers and 
the environment

NET ZERO CARBON 
BY 2027

Programme underway to 
deliver challenging net zero 
target

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
BUSINESS MODEL

STRATEGIC REPORT 

12

O U R  VISION

Our vision is to ‘be the 
national leader in the provision 
of sustainable water and 
wastewater services’. We want 
to continue to deliver value to 
customers and other 
stakeholders by focusing 
on our core competencies of 
water and wastewater 

OUR THEMES

ENVIRONMENT

CUSTOMER

COMPETITIVENESS

PEOPLE

COMMUNITIES

REPUTATION

S
E
U
L
A
V
R
U
O

CUSTOMER 
FOCUSED

We aim to exceed 
the expectations of 
our external and 
internal 
customers.

CREATIVE

We continuously 
strive for 
innovative and 
better ways to 
deliver our 
business.

RESULTS 
DRIVEN

We take personal 
responsibility for 
achieving 
excellent business 
results.

ETHICAL

We are open and 
honest in meeting 
our commitments, 
with a responsible 
approach to the 
environment and 
our communities.

ONE TEAM

We work together 
consistently, 
promoting co-
operation, to 
achieve our
corporate
objectives. 

OUR PURPOSE
Water is life. Every living cell on earth needs water to survive. The single most essential 
ingredient for human life to thrive, is clean drinking water. Our work is instrumental in 
fulfilling our basic human needs and protecting the source of life.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

13

OUR PURPOSE 

Water is life. Every living cell on earth needs water 
to survive. The single most essential ingredient for 
human life to thrive, is clean drinking water. Our work 
is instrumental in fulfilling our basic human needs 
and protecting the source of life.

WE ARE CUSTODIANS OF WATER

Delivering reliable and resilient services that are 
vital to public health.

We are the caretakers of water in our regions. Our 
practical purpose is to supply safe clean water, 
and remove and treat wastewater so that our 
communities enjoy excellent public health. 
Safeguarding the supply for future generations 
requires innovation, anticipating and instigating 
change and making the right decisions for the 
long term. We set effective and sustainable 
targets to match our ambition, always 
considering the legacy we leave. 

WE ARE STEWARDS OF THE 
ENVIRONMENT

Valuing the natural capital and ecosystems we 
depend on.

We hold ourselves to account on an ambitious set 
of indicators designed to protect and improve the 
environment within our regions. We recognise 
the significant contribution we can make to 
reducing pollution, generating renewable energy, 
preventing flooding and improving public access 
to recreation. Going beyond compensating for 
loss of natural resources, our activities should 
have a lasting positive impact on the natural 
environment. 

WE ARE COMMITTED TO DELIVERING 
WORLD-CLASS CUSTOMER SERVICE

Giving unrivalled customer experiences  
every time.

We strive to lead in customer service in our own 
industry and beyond. Customer service is core to 
our brand, values and culture. Our customers are 
supported to participate fully in our business, 
designing the services they receive, while our 
people know what is expected of them, and want 
our customers to always have complete trust and 
confidence in what we do. We own a customer’s 
problem, keep our promises and show each 
customer that they are special by focusing on 
individual needs. 

WE ARE THE LIFEBLOOD THAT 
FLOWS THROUGH OUR COMMUNITIES

Demonstrating our value and making a wider 
contribution to society.

We are integral to our communities, always 
listening to our customers so we understand 
what matters most to them and their 
expectations of us as a business that delivers 
public value. We are driven to protect the most 
vulnerable people in our society by eliminating 
water poverty and reducing any worries they 
face. Working, living and volunteering in our 
regions helps us to understand and positively 
impact the wellbeing of the communities we 
serve.

WE ENABLE EXTRAORDINARY 
LEADERS

Empowering people to know their purpose.

Working with a sense of purpose gives our people 
personal fulfilment. We foster a high performing 
culture and value diverse perspectives and skills. 
We support our leaders to develop high emotional 
intelligence, empowering our people to behave 
responsibly. Our people are held to account for 
living out our purpose, vision and values.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

14

TAKING OUR PURPOSE 
FORWARD

We want our purpose statement to effectively convey 
what we stand for in historical, ethical, emotional and 
practical terms.

Our next steps will be to carry out detailed work 
involving senior executive leaders and board 
members in the business to examine our purpose 
statement, and to consult with our employees, 
stakeholders and customers on how to keep it 
powerful and relevant. As we move beyond our 
immediate response to the Covid-19 pandemic, 
we will put these actions into place.

We want to be sure it resonates with our 
customers, stakeholders and employees not only 
now but into the future. This will ensure it 
continues to fit with our Vision and Values, 
demonstrating to all how we deliver public value.

Over recent months we have further reviewed 
best practice, looking not just at corporate 
reporting guidance, but considering how other 
companies are addressing purpose to ensure we 
can demonstrate we are leading in this area. We 
have also engaged with organisations that are 
driving purpose across the business sector, 
including the Confederation of British Industry 
(CBI), Business in the Community (BiTC), and This 
is Purpose, through the Social Mobility Pledge 
and more recently the C-19 Business Pledge. 
Through this we have confirmed that our purpose 
continues to drive our business effectively, and 
also identified how we should look at our purpose 
statement to ensure it fully encapsulates and 
communicates this ethos.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

15

OUR OUTCOMES: 2015-2020

THEME

OUTCOME

•  We deliver water and sewerage services that meet the needs of current and future 
    generations in a changing world.

•  We supply clean, clear drinking water that tastes good.

•	 We	provide	a	reliable	and	sufficient	supply	of	water.

•  Our customers consider the services they receive to be value for money.

•  Our customers are well informed about the services they receive and the value of  
    their water.

•  We provide a sewerage service that deals effectively with sewage and heavy rainfall.

•  We provide excellent service and impress our customers.

•	 	We	help	improve	the	quality	of	rivers	and	coastal	waters	for	the	benefit	of	people,	the 	

environment and wildlife.

•  We protect and enhance the environment in delivering our services, leading by example.

•	 We	are	an	efficient	and	innovative	company.

•	 	Our	finances	are	sound,	stable	and	achieve	a	fair	balance	between	customers  

and investors.

•  Our people are talented, committed and inspired to deliver great services to customers.

•  Our people act in line with our values.

•  We are seen as a great place to work.

•  Our workplaces are healthy and safe.

•  We are proud to contribute to the success of local communities.

•  We work in partnership towards common goals.

•   We are a company that customers trust.

CUSTOMER

ENVIRONMENT

COMPETITIVENESS

PEOPLE

COMMUNITIES

REPUTATION

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
OUR OUTCOMES: 2020-25

STRATEGIC REPORT 

16

UNRIVALLED 
CUSTOMER 
EXPERIENCE

AFFORDABLE  
AND INCLUSIVE 
SERVICES 

Our customers’ expectations are rising, and what 
customers want from us is changing too. We will 
deliver a package of measures to support our aim 
to deliver an unrivalled customer experience.

Water and sewerage services should be affordable 
for all of our customers, whatever their 
circumstances, and they should all have equal 
access to an unrivalled customer experience.

RELIABLE AND 
RESILIENT 
SERVICES 

We will continue to deliver reliable and resilient 
services by anticipating change, planning ahead, 
and by making the right long-term decisions 
about how to run our business.

LEADING IN 
INNOVATION

Super-charging our innovation culture is 
essential if we are to continue to deliver 
unrivalled experiences within the context 
of rising customer expectations, technological 
advances and changing political and 
physical climates.

IMPROVING THE 
ENVIRONMENT 

We will create a step change in our 
environmental activities, building on our role as 
stewards of the environment to demonstrate 
leadership, and to protect and improve the 
environment within our regions.

BUILDING 
SUCCESSFUL 
ECONOMIES IN 
OUR REGIONS

As a responsible business with a strong track 
record, it is important to us that we demonstrate 
leadership and make a wider contribution to life 
within our regions.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

17

OUR STAKEHOLDERS

We provide essential services to our customers and, 
as a licensed water and wastewater undertaker, we 
operate within a strict regulatory environment.

It is very important to us that we understand the 
needs of our many stakeholders to ensure that we 
continue to provide a great service and deliver 
our business Outcomes. We engage proactively 
with all of our stakeholders in our continuing 
efforts to provide an unrivalled customer 
experience.

CUSTOMER VOICE

Customer participation was fundamental to the 
development of our Business Plan strategy for the 
2020-25 Price Review (PR19), helping us to 
understand what matters most to customers 
about the services we provide, which areas of the 
business they would most like to influence and 
the best ways for us to engage with them. We 
engaged with over 400,000 of our customers to 
help shape our Business Plan through various 
means including design sprints, co-creation 
workshops and focus groups, with 91% of 
customers accepting our Business Plan.

We have continued to engage with our customers 
on an ongoing basis, through workshops, surveys, 
social media and face to face using Flo, our 
customer engagement vehicle. The launch of our 
new websites and customer app has created 
further engagement channels and we have been 
able to act quickly to incorporate feedback from 
customers into website enhancements. Examples 
of engagement activities which have taken place 
this year included our Whole Town Approach in 
Ashington and Leigh-on-Sea (see page 30), the 
Customer Zone at our Innovation Festival and 
Age UK events to share matters such as our 
Priority Services Register.

The Water Forum brings together a range of 
experts from various stakeholders to challenge 
the Company on behalf of our customers. It 
informs our approach to customer research and 
engagement on matters such as social tariffs 
research, attend customer participation 
workshops and partnership events as well as 
more formal meetings with management. 
Through this it provides challenge on areas 
where performance and outcomes for customers 
could be improved.

On a national and regional basis, customers’ 
interests are represented by the Consumer 

Council for Water (CCWater). We share and review 
customer literature with them before publication 
and engage on how we support vulnerable 
customers, as well as holding quarterly liaison 
meetings and attending regional public meetings. 
During the year, their Chief Executive attended a 
round table on water poverty and we also met to 
discuss readiness for the new C-MeX and 
Developer Services Measure of Experience 
(D-MeX) performance measures.

GOVERNMENT AND REGULATORY 
CONTEXT

Ofwat regulates prices and levels of customer 
service. We engage on key issues such as market 
reform and future price controls as well as the 
need to demonstrate strong governance and the 
importance of maintaining the trust and 
confidence of our customers. This is achieved 
through formal processes, such as our Annual 
Performance Report (APR) and responding to 
consultations, regular account management calls 
and participating in the marketplace for ideas. In 
2019 we hosted the Ofwat Chief Executive on a 
visit to our Innovation Festival and Chair on a 
visit to Innovate East. We also participated in 
Ofwat’s key campaigns covering innovation, 
resilience, customer participation and water 
stories.

The Drinking Water Inspectorate (DWI) monitors 
drinking water quality and we engage at both an 
operational and strategic level to review 
performance and promote good practice, in 
addition to reviewing specific improvement 
schemes. In addition, The DWI Chief Inspector 
attended our Innovation Festival.

The Environment Agency (EA) regulates 
environmental protection and we liaise on our 
environmental performance, discharge 
compliance, pollution and sewer flooding. In 
addition to regular performance reviews, we have 
worked collaboratively through catchment 
partnerships and local partnerships such as the 
Northumbrian Integrated Drainage Partnership 
(NIDP). One particular area of engagement over 
the past year has been in relation to Drainage and 
Wastewater Management Planning.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR PEOPLE AND SUPPLY CHAIN 
PARTNERS

We engage with our employees both through our 
Employee Relations Framework and via a range 
of communication channels, such as team 
briefings, director roadshows and regular internal 
communications. This covers a wide range of 
subjects from health, safety and wellbeing and 
staff benefits to values and behaviours and 
diversity. Our approach is described in more 
detail in the Performance Review section, under 
the People heading on pages 42 to 49.

To meet the challenges of delivering our AMP6 
(Asset Management Plan) capital investment 
programme as efficiently and effectively as 
possible, we implemented a new operating model 
with our supply chain, based around collaboration 
and co-operation. This involves joint framework 
governance groups, integrated programme 
delivery teams, joint recruitment campaigns and 
a joint framework for Health and Safety (H&S). In 
the year we carried out joint initiatives and 
approaches to health, safety and welfare, such as 
mental health first aiders, fire safety officers and 
psychological health checks.

STRATEGIC REPORT 

18

CIVIL SOCIETY

We engage with government and policy makers, 
through briefings site visits and party conference 
events, to ensure there is a good understanding of 
the services we deliver and the key issues facing 
our sector. We also work closely with local 
authorities through regular meetings at a senior 
level as well as more technical meetings on 
matters such as planning, flooding risk 
mitigation and economic development matters. 
Activities in the year included our partnership on 
developing underground asset map in the North 
East and a joint conference with developers to 
discuss planning and regulatory issues.

We work closely with many non-government 
organisations and charities to deliver our 
corporate social responsibility commitments and 
build strong relationships with the communities 
we serve. Our activity in this area is explained in 
detail in Our Contribution Report, available on our 
websites, and is summarised on pages 50 and 51 
under the Communities heading of our 
Performance Review.

We work with the media to help communicate 
messages to our customers through news 
releases, case studies and social media 
messaging. This covers a wide range of subjects 
such as the local impacts of capital investment 
schemes, environmental and community 
investment. Coverage in the year included 
campaigns such as Refill and Every Drop Counts 
as well as issues such as the flushability of wipes.

INVESTORS

We are conscious of our duty to act in the best 
interests of our shareholders and we seek to 
achieve a fair balance between them and our 
customers and other stakeholders, including debt 
investors.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 

19

SECTION 172 STATEMENT

The Directors of the Company have a duty to promote 
the success of the Company for the benefit of its 
members as a whole, as set out in Section 172 of the 
Companies Act 2006. 

In doing so, the Directors must have regard to the 
needs of, and impact on, our many stakeholders 
and other matters described in the section. This 
Section 172(1) Statement has been prepared in 
accordance with new requirement established by 
the Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) 
Regulations 2018 to describe how the Directors 
have had regard to the matters set out in section 
172(1)(a) to (f) of the Companies Act when 
performing this duty.

HOW THE BOARD OPERATES

The Governance Report on pages 64 to 104 
describes how the Board has operated during the 
year, and describes how the Board has:

• established the Company’s purpose, strategy
and values, and is satisfied that these and its
culture reflect the needs of all those it serves;

• taken full responsibility for all aspects of the

Company’s business over the long term;

• demonstrated leadership and an approach to

transparency and governance which engenders
trust and ensures accountability for their
actions; and

• the range of skills and experience, including

strong independent membership, enabling it to
make decisions that address diverse customer
and stakeholder needs.

LONG-TERM PLANNING HORIZON

The nature of our business requires a long term 
view to be taken on matters such as water 
resources and drainage management planning. 
This long term perspective underpinned the 
Board’s strategy for the PR19 Business Plan, 

which was called ‘Living water: Our plan 2020-25 
and beyond’, and shaped the Board’s responses to 
the PR19 Draft and Final Determinations (see Key 
Decision – CMA Referral below).

During the year, the Board considered delivery 
strategies for the ambitious goals set out in the 
Business Plan. One example was the approval of 
an updated energy strategy which will underpin 
delivery of the commitment to be carbon neutral 
by 2027, and additional investment in solar power 
towards that goal. Another example was the 
Board discussion of how the Company is getting 
value from innovation to support delivery of 
ambitious goals set out in the Business Plan.

The Board, through its Risk & Compliance Sub-
committee (R&CSC), monitors the principal risks 
and uncertainties facing the business including 
longer-term strategic risks. A detailed review of 
the Strategic Risk Register is carried out each 
year, most recently in November 2019, which 
considers horizon scanning reports from external 
sources. This year, two additional longer term 
risks were considered related to plastics pollution 
and the increasing reliance on global data 
platforms.

The Board closely monitors the financial position 
of the business through a rolling five year plan, 
whilst also considering longer term financial 
resilience over a ten year time horizon as 
explained in the viability statement on page 102 
and 103. 

STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT

The Company has a wide range of stakeholders 
and we describe how we engage proactively with 
these groups in Our Stakeholder section on pages 
17 and 18. Engagement with our stakeholders was 

Key Decision – Purpose Statement

The Board has discussed and refined the Company’s purpose statement and the updated version is set 
out on page 13. This was informed by the extensive consultation process carried out in the 
development of the PR19 Business Plan, with responses from over 400,000 customers and well as the 
Water Forum stakeholder group, regulators, employees, supplier and other partners. The Board ensured 
that the vision, corporate themes and values aligned to the purpose, as visualised in the business model 
on page 12.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTcentral to ‘Living water: Our plan 2020-25 and 
beyond’, which was shaped by responses from 
more than 400,000 customers as well as our 
Water Forum stakeholder, regulators, employees 
and other partners. Through this process, the 
Board agreed stretching performance 
commitments to deliver improved service to 
stakeholders across a wide range of measures, 
which the Board monitors through the balanced 
scorecard (see page 22 and 23).

Much of the stakeholder engagement takes place 
at an operational level, the Board receiving 
regular reports in respect of customer service, 
operational performance, health and safety and 
key risks, such as data security of customer and 
employee data. However, the Board also takes 
steps to engage directly with employees and 
customers, as described on page 74, with one 
Independent NED (INED),, M Fay, designated to 
engage with the workforce and to provide the 
Board with a first-hand assessment of the culture 
of the business.

The Board reviews company performance across 
a wide range of subjects at each meeting through 
the balanced scorecard (see pages 22 and 23), 
which tracks performance across our corporate 
themes of Customer, Environment, 
Competitiveness, People and Communities, and 
also through management reports on health and 
safety, finance, customer, regulation and 
operational performance. This provides a 
balanced view of performance across matters of 
interest to each of our key stakeholder groups.

STRATEGIC REPORT  20

Examples of stakeholder matters considered by 
the Board during the year included:

•  Customers: updates on the short term impacts 

on customer service due to the implementation 
of new systems, the benefits from investment 
in new digital platforms and efforts to extend 
engagement on social tariffs, especially for low 
income pensioners (see pages 25 to 33 for more 
information on Customer matters);

•  Environment: the Board approved the updated 

energy strategy to deliver net zero carbon 
emissions by 2027 and monitored performance 
on a range of environmental performance 
targets (see pages 34 to 38 for more 
information on Environment matters);

•  Employees: the health and safety of employees 
is the first matter considered by the Board at 
each meeting, including performance against 
leading and lagging indicators and progress 
against the Everyone Home Safe Every Day 
Strategy (see pages 42 to 49 for more 
information on Employee matters);

•  Community: consideration of sustainability 

matters and the impacts on the local 
community when approving capital projects 
and contracts (see pages 50 to 52 for more 
information on Community matters pages); 
and

•  Suppliers: new contract awards including 

extension of long term framework agreements, 
value of innovation partnerships and approval 
of Slavery and Human Trafficking statement to 
ensure transparency in supply chains 

Key Decision – CMA Referral

In February 2020, the Board decided unanimously to ask Ofwat to refer its PR19 FD to the CMA for 
review. This followed discussions at a series of Board meetings. The Business Plan was developed 
taking account of the views of more than 400,000 customers and other stakeholders. Our customers’ key 
priorities were efficient costs and assurance that water and wastewater services would be robust, 
deliverable and resilient for the future. The Board agreed that the FD did not properly reflect the views 
and priorities of customers, or the need for long term operational, environmental and financial 
sustainability. The Board took account of the trade off between lower customer bills in the short-term 
and long term resilience but felt strongly that the FD fell well short of what customers clearly stated 
were their priorities.

S172 DUTY

The Directors of NWL consider, both individually and together, that they have acted to promote the long 
term success of the Company for the benefit of its members as a whole during the year ended 31 March 
2020, in accordance with their duties under S172 of the Companies Act.

Key Decision – Alignment of Remuneration to Stakeholder Benefits

The Board, through its Remuneration Committee, has agreed changes to the structures of both its short 
term and long term incentive plans for senior executives, in order to provide greater alignment to 
delivering benefits for customers and other key stakeholder groups.  In both cases, with effect from 
2020/21, 60% of benefits under the schemes will relate to non-financial measures taken from the 
balanced scorecard.  These measures align directly to benefit customers, the environment, our 
employees and the communities we operate in.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

21

PERFORMANCE REVIEW

In order to measure delivery of the Company 
Business Plan and goals, we use a balanced scorecard 
of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) covering the full 
range of our strategic themes.

The top section of the Performance table on 
pages 22 to 23 (with a blue header block) shows 
our performance against the Outcomes, Measures 
of Success (MoS) and PCs we agreed in the PR14 
price review. 

We are pleased that once again we have achieved 
the majority of our performance targets in the 
period, and shown year on year improvement on 
many of our important customer targets, 
including leakage, discolouration, mains bursts 
and value for money. However, we aim to achieve 
all of our PCs and we are always disappointed 
when our performance doesn’t meet our targets, 
albeit narrowly in some cases. We show ( ) where 
we have met our performance against our 
promise in that year, ( ) where we have not met 

our performance but not incurred a penalty, and  
( ) where we have not met our performance and 
have incurred a penalty.

The bottom section (with a green header block) 
reports our performance against our internal 
targets under our Competitiveness, People and 
Communities Outcomes.

We have reviewed and revised our Balanced 
Scorecard for 2020/21, taking account of the MoS 
and PCs set in our PR19 FD. Though we track a 
wide number of metrics in our business, we have 
reduced the number of key indicators to focus on 
the most important matters to our customers. 
The new targets are listed on page 24.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT  22

ACTUAL PERFORMANCE AGAINST THE KPI TARGETS

SCORECARD MEASURE

UNITS

2018/19  
PERFORMANCE

2019/20 
PERFORMANCE

PC

ACHIEVED

CUSTOMER

We provide excellent service and impress our customers

score (out of 100)

85.9

>=90

n/a

n/a

Ofwat Service Incentive 
Mechanism (SIM)

Independent overall 
customer satisfaction 
survey

Domestic customer 
satisfaction, net promoter 
score

Independent survey on 
keeping customers informed

score (out of 10)

8.7

>=8.2

score

+43

>=32

%

93

>=94

Our customers consider the services they receive to be value for money

NWL independent value for 
money survey

CCWater value for money 
survey – Water NW

CCWater value for money 
survey – Sewerage NW

CCWater value for money 
survey – Water ESW

score (out of 10)

8.2

>=7.9

%

%

%

75

78

71

>=83

>=84

>=73

8.6

+40

93

8.1

79

84

76

We supply clean, clear drinking water that tastes good

Overall drinking water 
compliance

Discoloured water 
complaints

Satisfaction with taste and 
odour of tap water

%

99.949

100

99.915

no. of complaints

2,594

<=2,908

2,349

no. of complaints

1,060

<=987

862

We provide a reliable and sufficient supply of water

Leakage – NW

Leakage – ESW

Interruptions to water 
supply for more than 3 
hours

Properties experiencing 
poor water pressure

Ml/day

Ml/day

average minutes/ 
property

136.3

<=137

64.2

<=66

09:12

<=05:00

134.8

63.2

06:08

no. of properties

200

<=216

220

Water mains bursts

no. of burst mains

3,853

<=4,586

2,817

table continued…

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

23

SCORECARD MEASURE

UNITS

2018/19  
PERFORMANCE

2019/20 
PERFORMANCE

PC

ACHIEVED

We provide a sewerage service that deals effectively with sewage and heavy rainfall

Properties	flooded	
externally

no. of properties

902

<=1,318

1,001

Properties	flooded	internally

no. of properties

124

<=186

Repeat	sewer	flooding

no. of properties

60

<=496

139

75

Properties	flooded	
externally – transferred 
network (TDS)

Properties	flooded	internally	
(TDS)

Sewer collapses

Sewer collapses (TDS)

ENVIRONMENT

no. of properties

2,967

<=2,931

3,102

no. of properties

246

<=228

number

number

49

59

<=58

<=84

205

50

63

We help improve the quality of rivers and coastal waters for the benefit of people, the environment and wildlife

Pollution incidents (category 
3)

Bathing water quality 
compliance

Sewage treatment works 
discharge compliance

number

no.	sufficient

no. failing works

We protect and enhance the environment 

Greenhouse gas emissions

SCORECARD MEASURE

ktCO2e

UNITS

59

33

0

<=115

>=34

0

63

33

2

148

<=150

139

2018/19  
PERFORMANCE

TARGET

2019/20 
PERFORMANCE

ACHIEVED

COMPETITIVENESS

Gearing: net debt to Regulatory 
Capital Value (RCV)

Regulated gearing: net debt to 
RCV

Interest cover

PEOPLE

Employee engagement –  
trust index

Employee engagement – 
external survey

%

%

67.2

<=77.5

66.8

<=70

times

3.6

>=2.4

%

n/a

>=65

67.8

67.2

4.0

62

score

One to Watch

n/a

n/a

n/a

Lost time reportable accidents

number

7

<=3

7

COMMUNITIES

Ethisphere

awarded/not 
awarded

awarded

awarded

awarded

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
MEASURES AND KPI TARGETS FOR 2020/21

SCORECARD MEASURE

CUSTOMER

C-MeX: Customer experience

C-MeX: Customer service

D-MeX: Developer services measure of experience

Interruptions to supply > 3 hours

Repeat	sewer	flooding	incidents

Internal	sewer	flooding	incidents

Compliance Risk Index (CRI)I

ENVIRONMENT

Leakage (NW)

Leakage (ESW)

Discharge permit compliance

Pollution events (Category 1&2)

Greenhouse gas emissions

SCORECARD MEASURE

COMPETITIVENESS

Gearing: net debt to RCV

Regulated gearing:  net debt to RCV

Interest cover

PEOPLE

Employee engagement index

Lost time reportable accidents

COMMUNITIES

STRATEGIC REPORT  24

UNITS

position

position

position

mm:ss

number

number

score

Ml/d

Ml/d

%

number

ktCO2e

UNITS

%

%

times

%

number

2020/21 
TARGET

Top 2

Top 2

Top 2

<=05:24

<=46

<=285

<=2

<=126.5

<=56.4

>=99

<=1

<=57.2

2020/21 
TARGET

<=77.5

<=70

>=2.4

>=65

<=3

Trust - BITC Platinum Plus / Ethisphere / CCWater

awarded

awarded

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
CUSTOMER

CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE

Ofwat has used its SIM to measure our customers’ 
experiences of dealing with us over recent years. 
As part of its PR19 FD, Ofwat assessed SIM 
performance for the four years from 2015/16 to 
2018/19 and we were pleased to receive a positive 
outperformance reward of 1.9% of retail revenue.

For future years, Ofwat has introduced a new 
customer measure of experience (C-MeX). In 
addition to assessing service received, this is a 
broader and more representative measure of 
customers’ wider experience and perception of 
our performance. C-MeX has operated in ‘shadow 
year’ for 2019/20, with no reward or penalty 
opportunity, to help companies and Ofwat to 
understand the new metric, and Ofwat published 
updated guidelines as part of its FD. Our ambition 
is to be in the top 2 companies for C-MeX. For the 
shadow year, we ranked 5 out of 17 water 
companies overall.

A separate measure has been introduced as a 
developer services measure of experience, 
D-MeX, assessing the service that we provide to 
developer services customers, including property 
developers, self-lay providers and those with new 
appointments and variations. This applies similar 
principles to C-MeX and has also operated in 
shadow reporting this year. Our ambition is to be 
in the top position for D-MeX across the AMP. For 
the shadow year, based on data shared between 
water companies we were very pleased to be 
ranked 1 out of 17 for the qualitative score.

“We provide excellent 
service and impress 
our customers”

STRATEGIC REPORT 

25

UNRIVALLED CUSTOMER 
EXPERIENCE

Our clear ambition is to provide an unrivalled 
customer experience to each and every customer, 
whatever their circumstances or needs, and 
however they choose to contact us. 
Understanding our customers’ preferences and 
changing needs is key to our success in providing 
an unrivalled customer experience to each and 
every one of our customers, whenever they 
engage with us. This is encapsulated in our 
Unrivalled Customer Experience strategy and 
informed by engagement with over 400,000 
customers through the development of our PR19 
Business Plan.

We have continued to engage across our 
customer base, using our mobile customer 
engagement vehicle, Flo, to reach different 
groups. For example, we’ve attended events at 
Newcastle, Durham and Northumbria universities 
to understand the needs of our student customers 
and, as a result, developed specific web pages to 
better engage and inform them. Flo has also been 
a proven model to engage more widely in 
understanding what our customers are interested 
in, such as key parts of our strategies in areas like 
water efficiency, and our Every Drop Counts 
campaigns, to sewer flooding and our ‘Bin the 
Wipe’ message. We’ve also used it as a vehicle to 
share more about our inclusivity strategies and to 
encourage customers to talk with us about the 
things that matter most to them. 

We continue to work to evolve our thinking in 
line with best practice, using the Institute of 
Customer Services’ UKCSI as a benchmark, and 
working with organisations like KPMG to 
understand some of their international 
benchmarking principles and measurements. We 
ran an Unrivalled Customer Experience sprint at 
our Innovation Festival, bringing together key 
speakers from across a number of industries and 
from a number of key ‘north east’ companies, 
ensuring we were aware of what businesses and 
customers expect in 2020 and beyond, in respect 
of service, experience and corporate social 
responsibility.

Customers in 2020 and beyond are looking for 
more and different things and we’re evolving our 
thinking in order to reflect these nuanced 
changes and providing leading edge thinking and 
models. We are developing these ideas and 
refreshing our Unrivalled Customer Experience 
and Inclusivity strategies to help us continue to 
meet our customers developing needs.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
DIGITAL TRANSFORMATION

Over the past few years we have committed a 
considerable investment in our transformational 
change programme, ONCE (Our New Customer 
Experience), including the implementation of our 
new Customer Care and Billing system. As with 
any significant change programme, the transition 
from disparate legacy systems to an holistic suite 
of future-proofed and integrated systems 
involved a steep learning curve for our people 
and took some time to stabilise, during which we 
saw some short term impacts on performance. 
We invested in extra staff, training and support 
as we worked through the changes, and are now 
beginning to see the benefits of the increased 
capabilities.  We are also pleased that these 
improvements have been recognised in our 
meetings with CCWater and other stakeholders 
as well as in customer feedback.

Think Digital is a key component of our overall 
Unrivalled Customer Experience Strategy and 
one where we’ve driven significant improvement 
and engagement across the year. We’ve engaged 
with colleagues and customers through a number 
of channels, including face-to-face interviews, 
A-B testing, digital focus groups, customer 
testing, online forum engagement to test ideas 
and online digital challenges. We’ve aimed to 
engage with different customer groups for this, 
working with customers from school work 
experience ‘future customer’ groups, to students, 
to working customers to customers who have 
retired and we engaged with as part of our link 
with Age UK.

This culminated in the launch of our new 
websites in October 2019, moving to a new and 
agile platform with completely new customer 
journeys and experiences. This is a key part of 
our digitalisation strategy, to give customers 
access to channels of choice and the ability to 
self-serve and engage with us in a new way. Our 
new websites have a completely new look and 
feel and customer feedback has been great. Since 
go live we have worked to implement over 100 
enhancements to the customer experience on the 
website, responding to customer suggestions. In 
March 2020 we saw a record numbers of 
transactions coming through the website and our 
new customer app, which we launched in 
February 2020.

STRATEGIC REPORT  26

CUSTOMER SATISFACTION AND 
VALUE FOR MONEY

Our aim is to deliver an unrivalled customer 
experience and, in addition to our C-MeX 
performance, we track various measures of 
customer satisfaction with the services we provide 
and the value for money of those services.

Our own customer satisfaction research is carried 
out quarterly by an independent company. Though 
our score fell slightly in the year from 8.7 to 8.6, 
this remains a strong result and well above our PC.  
As an alternative indicator, we use Net Promoter 
Score to measure customer advocacy, the loyalty 
that exists between a company and its customers, 
and our strong positive score of +40 ranks us 
alongside leading UK businesses.

Our customers tell us that it is important to keep 
them well informed and 93% of our customers 
have told us that they were satisfied that they are 
supplied with all the information they need to feel 
informed about the services we provide. We 
engaged with more than 400,000 customers during 
the development of our PR19 Business Plan to 
Ofwat and continue to engage on an ongoing 
basis.

“Our customers consider 
the services they receive 
to be value for money”

Our customers have also told us that value for 
money is very important to them, and this is a key 
area where they would like to be involved in 
influencing our future plans. We use two surveys 
to help us assess whether our customers think we 
offer good value for money.

CCWater carries out research with customers 
about the value for money of services provided. We 
were delighted to see significant increases in our 
scores in both our NW region, for water and 
sewerage services, and in our ESW region, for 
water only, where average bills are higher. We 
achieved our PC against two out of three of these 
measures, for water services in our ESW area and 
wastewater services in our NW area, but were 
disappointed not to achieve our PC for water 
services in our NW region. We continue to strive to 
keep bills at affordable levels and we describe our 
work to support customers in vulnerable 
circumstance below. We also commission 
independent surveys for which the value for 
money score reduced marginally to 8.1 out of 10, 
remaining above our PC.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

27

Looking ahead, in our Business Plan we 
committed to the largest reduction in customer 
bills in the country. We will continue to work with 
DWP to extend the data sharing initiatives which 
will enable us to focus on proactive support and 
our customer digital twin project to help target 
how we promote our affordability schemes.  We 
are also working with our credit reference partners 
on automating online eligibility for support 
schemes and we are exploring a digital banking 
income and expenditure initiative. In addition, we 
continue to support the work with NEA on water 
poverty developing new ways to support 
customers save money on both their water and 
energy bills.

“Our customers are well 
informed about the 
services they receive and 
the value of water”

SUPPORTING CUSTOMERS IN 
VULNERABLE CIRCUMSTANCES

We have committed to eradicate water poverty 
across our supply areas, working with the charity 
National Energy Action (NEA) in an innovative 
research and delivery partnership. We have a 
number of arrangements in place already to 
support customers who are in vulnerable 
circumstances, as set out in our Inclusivity 
Strategy, which we developed in partnership with 
our customers. Through our strong partnership 
with the debt charity StepChange we continue to 
assist our customers to receive holistic debt 
advice. With the benefit of our data sharing 
agreement with StepChange we know which of 
our customers are seeking debt advice so that we 
can provide them with the breathing space they 
need to work through their finances.

We extended our affordability tariff in 2019/20 to 
include those in receipt of pension credits, 
building on our existing tariff which provides a 
discount of up to 50% for low income households 
where their water bills represent more than 3% of 
net income. We have been working actively with 
the Department for Work and Pensions (DWP) to be 
able to make use of the powers within the Digital 
Economy Act to identify customers who would be 
eligible for our financial support schemes. This 
will allow us to proactively check eligibility for our 
customers and provide support to those who need 
it.  

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

28
28

JUST ADD YOU

We are passionate about water, and understand 
its importance to everyday life. Our customers’ 
expectations are rising all the time. 

We’re proud of what we do already but know we 
can do more on our customer focus, consistently 
creating unrivalled experiences. Making sure we 
get it right first time is more important than ever. 
We want our customers to know we’ve done a 
great job, and that they matter to us. 

In 2019 we launched our external customer 
campaign across our regions, ‘Just Add Water’, to 
remind our customers just how important water 
is to everyday life. However, we know that we 
can’t give our customers an unrivalled experience 
without every one of our team playing a part in 
that, so we also created ‘Just Add You’ to 
showcase the diverse and brilliant ways our 
people help our customers every day.

We asked our customers what was important to 
them and focus our service on the five priorities 
chosen by our customers:

 • Show each customer that they’re important 

to us;

 • ‘Own’ the customer’s problem;

 • Make it easy for them;

 • Be proud to promote our great work in local 

communities; and

 • Keep our promises.

To complement these, and to support in 
delivering an unrivalled customer experience 
every time, we’ve taken some great learning from 
a model developed by KPMG Nunwood; the Six 
Pillars of customer experience excellence. The 
Six Pillars provide a framework that supports 
leading companies around the world in driving 
positive change in their businesses. These are:

 • Integrity – demonstrating trustworthiness;

 • Resolution – putting issues right quickly;

 • Expectations – understanding and exceeding 

expectations;

 • Time and effort – enabling customers to 

achieve their objectives quickly and easily;

 • Personalisation – understanding and adapting 

to a customer’s specific needs; and

 • Empathy – relating to a customer’s experience.

Our customers are at the heart of everything we 
do and being recognised by our customers for 
great customer service is really important to us. 
By understanding our five customer priorities, 
and using the Six Pillars, whenever we engage 
with a customer means we can make sure we are 
delivering a world class service that we can be 
really proud of, each and every time.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT  29

CLEAN CLEAR WATER THAT 
TASTES GOOD

We have been working to reduce the number of 
discoloured water complaints in our NW area for 
more than ten years now and have seen a 
significant improvement over this time. Our 
performance improved further in 2019 to 2,349 
contacts, compared to 2,594 contacts in 2018, the 
fifth year in a row we have performed better than 
our PC. However, when we compare to other 
companies in the industry, we recognise there is 
still more to do. We are continuing to make 
improvements at our water treatment works and 
managing our networks to reduce the 
accumulation of discolouration material. To 
continue our improvement journey we have 
identified a new programme of work, with DWI 
support, for our discolouration management 
plans for 2020-25.

The drinking water we supply is of a very high 
quality but occasionally some of our customers 
perceive different tastes or odours. This can 
occur as a result of the use of chlorine to 
maintain good hygiene in our water supply 
network, a change in where a customer’s water 
comes from, or how it is treated, or even issues 
with a customer’s own plumbing. The number of 
contacts we received reduced from 1,060 to 862 in 
2019, which represents upper quartile 
performance in the sector. 

RELIABLE WATER SUPPLY

Delivering a reliable supply of water to customers 
is core to what we do and we have delivered 
amongst the lowest levels of interruptions to 
supply in the industry over a number of years. 
After a challenging year in 2018/19, we have 
reduced the average interruption time per 
property from over 9 minutes to 6 minutes 8 
seconds in 2019/20. This has been achieved 
through refresher training to our field and office 
based staff to refocus our commitment to keeping 
interruptions as short as possible, using 
temporary supply equipment where possible.

“We provide a reliable and 
sufficient supply of water”

WATER QUALITY

The water we supply must meet the stringent 
quality standards set by the DWI, to ensure that it 
is safe to drink and free of colour and particles, 
poor tastes and smells. Our overall drinking water 
compliance remains extremely high at 99.915%. 
To put this in context, this represented only 58 
failures from over 86,000 tests, and it is important 
to note that none of the failures represented a 
risk to health. 

Whilst we do expect some variation in 
performance due to samples being taken on a 
random basis, we are committed to improving 
water quality even further and have been 
delivering our long term plans to achieve this. We 
have been working end to end through our water 
supply system, from protecting raw water by our 
catchment management activities through to 
investing in improvements to our water 
treatment and distribution processes and 
systems.

“We supply clean, clear 
drinking water that 
tastes good”

We are continually evolving our processes to 
improve water quality performance over the 
longer term through our catchment management 
approach. Over the years Catchment Partnerships 
have become an essential way of working to 
improve the water environment and in 2019 we 
have continued our extensive engagement with 
the nine Catchment Partnerships in our NW and 
ESW regions. We work with a wide range of 
partners, including Rivers and Wildlife Trusts, 
Local Authorities, the EA and Natural England, 
and this has allowed us to pool our activity and 
funding in order for us all to make a difference to 
the water environment for our customers. 
Activities in the year have included hosting and 
funding events for farmers and land managers, 
and delivering on-farm improvements, and 
supporting catchment projects such as the 
Pennine-PeatLIFE project.

The DWI introduced a new measure of drinking 
water quality in 2017 called the CRI. This uses 
information from the whole source to tap journey, 
through water treatment works, networks and 
customer taps, to make a more exacting 
assessment of water quality. The CRI is a risk 
calculation and a perfect score is zero, indicating 
no failure of any standard within the entire water 
supply system. Our ambition is to drive towards a 
zero score over time. 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
We have maintained our focus on managing 
leakage throughout the year, aided by the 
relatively mild weather over the year and a 
significant reduction in burst mains. Leakage 
averaged 134.8 Ml/d in NW and 63.2 Ml/d in ESW, 
comfortably achieving our PC level in each of our 
operating regions. This performance was 
supported by the innovative actions we have 
taken over recent years, including using satellite 
imaging to help locate leaks and our online 
leakage portal to allow customers to report leaks 
more easily.

The number of water mains bursts reduced from 
3,853 to 2,817. In order to maintain a stable burst 
rate we invest in replacing sections of our vast 
network of water pipes each year. In 2019/20 we 
replaced almost 70km of distribution mains 
across our operational areas. We have also been 
progressing with an innovative project looking at 
how we could further reduce bursts in the future 
by better managing ‘pressure transients’ which 
are high pressure shocks that reduce the life of 
water pipes and cause bursts. 

We proactively monitor and investigate water 
pressures in the network so that we can identify 
customers who are not receiving sufficient 
pressure and take action. We have improved the 
pressure for 947 customers during the year, 
leaving 220 properties on the low pressure 
property register at the end of the year.

STRATEGIC REPORT 

30

WATER EFFICIENCY

In addition to reducing water lost from our 
network, in 2019 we adapted and enhanced our 
Whole Town Approach to deliver multiple key 
campaigns in a community-focused and targeted 
programme. We delivered the programme in the 
towns of Ashington, Northumberland and Leigh-
on-Sea, Essex, presenting ourselves in their 
community in a ‘one-stop shop’ to offer our help 
in whatever way we could. In addition to our 
Every Drop Counts water efficiency message, we 
added our Bring Your Own Bottle environmental 
message and Water Without The Worry customer 
affordability support. The co-ordinated approach 
was a great success in terms of engagement and 
customer satisfaction.

“We provide a sewerage 
service that deals 
effectively with sewage 
and heavy rainfall”

Another water efficiency campaign we launched 
in the year was our ‘Leaky Loo’ programme. We 
know from research that between 5% and 8% of 
households have a leaking toilet wasting between 
200 and 400 litres a day. For NWL this equates to 
approximately 105,000 homes wasting around 
23Ml of water each day. We have introduced a 
service where we help customers identify if their 
toilet is leaking and repair it for them if it is. In 
addition to saving our customers money, we are 
helping to improve water efficiency towards our 
ambitious goal of reducing per capita 
consumption.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

31

Communications, including our ‘Bin The Wipe’ 
campaign (see case study on page 32) aims to 
avoid blockages caused by misuse of sewers. Our 
newly created focused teams include a mix of 
technical and operational resources to respond 
to incidents, investigate root causes and fix 
problems identified on the network. Operational 
planning is identifying improvements in the way 
we work to help reduce the number of incidents 
occurring which are within our control. The 
tactical plan will support our longer term service 
delivery strategy for managing sewer flooding.  

Occasionally the structure of a sewer can 
collapse, which can be due to ground movement, 
third party damage or age, and this can cause 
flooding or pollution. The number of sewer 
collapses remained at similar low levels to the 
previous year and well below the PCs.

SEWER FLOODING 

Sewer flooding is one of the worst service failures 
our customers can experience and reducing this 
remains one of our highest business priorities. 
Over the past year we have experienced a 
number of months where we have had sustained 
periods of wet weather, which has impacted our 
performance in this area. As a result, while the 
total number of properties flooding internally has 
reduced from last year, we were disappointed to 
see the number of properties flooding externally 
or suffering repeat flooding increase slightly. 

Four out of our five sewer flooding measures  
achieved their PC, with external flooding from 
the network of drains and sewers transferred into 
our ownership a few years ago missing the PC 
slightly. Sewerage investigations, surveying and 
mapping of our transferred network continues  
to improve each year and this will help us to 
further improve our sewer flooding performance 
in this area.

We have agreed further challenging targets on 
sewer flooding for the next five years. In order 
to reduce the risk of sewer flooding and to help 
achieve the commitments we have made within 
our business plan, a sewer flooding tactical plan 
was developed to identify and deliver effective 
near term interventions. The sewer flooding 
tactical plan includes interventions around 
the core themes of customer communication, 
focused teams, improved operational  
planning, better use of data and an increased 
CCTV programme. 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

32
32

BIN THE WIPE 

We have to clean out 15,000 blockages a year from 
our sewer network, approximately 64% of which are 
caused by people flushing wipes. 

These blockages can cause sewage to back up 
into customers’ homes or to flood into the 
environment, in rivers or even beaches, and we 
want to stop that happening. Even brands of 
wipes that have the word “flushable” on the 
packet can contribute to this problem, so we want 
people to dispose of all wipes in bins, not down 
the toilet.

Historically, we have tried to encourage people to 
only put ‘toilet paper, pee and poo down the loo’. 
However, the problem persists and we want to 
create sustainable, behavioural change that 
protects customers, their homes and the 
environment. In November 2019 we launched our 
new customer behaviour change campaign ‘Bin 
the Wipe’. Alongside this overarching campaign, 
we also launched three targeted pilots in hot spot 
areas; Newcastle, Stockton and Redcar with the 
aim of reducing the amount of blockages caused 
by wipes in our sewer network.

Redcar – The Big Bin Giveaway

During our research we found that more than half 
of households did not have a bin in any bathroom. 
We visited all houses in this area to explain how 
flushing wipes can cause sewer flooding and 
gave each household a bin to put their wipes in 
rather than flushing them down the toilet. We are 
carrying out follow up communication and 
surveys to reinforce behaviour changes and our 
wastewater team is monitoring the network to 
see if the number of wipes ending up in our sewer 
network has reduced.

Stockton – Making blockages a moment of change

In January 2020 we wrote to all the households in 
this area to let them know we would be 
monitoring the sewers in the area, using smart 
technology to pinpoint which houses are flushing 
wipes. We also shared imagery of houses that 
have been flooded in the area because of 
blockages caused by wet wipes. Our wastewater 
team are now carrying out proactive and reactive 
work to pinpoint offending streets using our 
porcupine equipment, which catches wipes in the 
network on its spikes and allows the team to 
identify which direction the wipes have travelled 
from back to specific houses. We then engage 
directly with those customers through a five 
stage process.

Newcastle – Getting into good make up habits 

Research has shown that over 50% of the wet 
wipe blockages we have to clear have been  
used for removing make up. We launched a 
specific make up focused ‘Bin the Wipe’  
campaign in seven Newcastle postcodes, sharing 
messages about alternative products people can 
use to clean their face using social media 
‘influencers’ as part of an integrated 
communications campaign.

We have seen a strong start to our social media 
campaign with our posts reaching more than 
450,000 people and drawing more than 36,500 
engagements. We’ve had continued support from 
a wide range of partners, including local 
authorities who have re-affirmed their support for 
#BinTheWipe.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
INTELLIGENT ASSET MANAGEMENT

RESILIENCE FRAMEWORK

STRATEGIC REPORT 

33

We manage a large and complex asset base 
where a failure could have significant impacts on 
our customers and the environment. We know 
from our research that our customers are 
increasingly interested in the reliability and 
resilience of their water and wastewater services.

We have a strong track record as a resilient 
company. Our water resources are very secure 
and we have a security of supply index of 100% in 
all of our water resource zones across the full 40 
year planning horizon of our water resources 
management plan. Our sewer flooding 
performance for both internal flooding and repeat 
flooding incidents demonstrates a magnitude of 
improvement since 2015.

We understand that the uncertainties that exist 
in today’s world, such as climate change, will 
continue to challenge our business into the 
future. To demonstrate that we are moving to a 
position of strength in the future we have 
developed our own Resilience Framework, an 
effective way to show the interdependency and 
complexity of our business systems across 
corporate, financial and operational aspects. Our 
Resilience Framework provides a structure for us 
to achieve resilience in the round by taking an 
integrated and systematic approach to 
understanding risk and resilience challenges 
across all of our business areas. More information 
on this can be found in our Business Plan at  
www.nwgourplan.co.uk

We adopt an integrated approach to managing 
our assets, which means finding the right balance 
between operational and long-term maintenance 
and investing in new assets at the right time, in 
the interests of current and future customers. We 
have company-wide accreditation to ISO 55001 
Asset Management, demonstrating that we follow 
best practice in the long-term management of 
our assets.

Our Intelligent Asset Management (iAM) 
programme is building on this approach and will 
deliver both improved systems and processes 
and enhanced data and analytics to improve how 
we manage our assets.  The first two phases of 
this programme, covering customer contact for 
operational matters, and below ground assets on 
the waste water network and water network in 
ESW, were implemented successfully during the 
year. The roll out for water network in NW was 
delayed until summer 2020 as a result of the 
Covid-19 pandemic.

ASSET HEALTH

We use the concept of Asset Health to assess the 
effectiveness of our long-term stewardship of our 
assets, based on two baskets of measures, for 
water and wastewater. As asset health is about 
the long-term stewardship of our assets, we 
assess our performance on a three-year rolling 
average basis.

Three out of four of our measures for water 
performed better than their PC for the three year 
period 2017/18 to 2019/20. However, our PC for 
overall drinking water compliance is set at a zero 
failure rate and, though we have a very high level 
of compliance, we did have a small number of 
failures in the year.

Similarly, on wastewater three out of four of our 
measures for water performed better than their 
PC for the three year period 2017/18 to 2019/20, 
but we had a zero PC target for sewage treatment 
works discharge compliance failures and have 
suffered an average of one failure each year on a 
three year rolling basis.

More detail on our asset health performance is 
available in our APR.

“We deliver water and 
sewerage services that 
meet the needs of current 
and future generations in 
a changing world”

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 

34

ENVIRONMENT

We are committed to meeting our ambitious goal 
to have zero pollutions as a result of our assets and 
operations, and to have the best rivers and bathing 
water beaches in the country for the benefit of people, 
the environment and wildlife.

POLLUTION INCIDENTS

We manage and maintain a network of almost 
30,000km of sewers across the NW region. When 
we have problems in our sewerage system, such 
as from blockages, mechanical breakdowns or 
power outages, untreated sewage can sometimes 
escape into watercourses and the sea causing 
environmental harm. 

We continue to focus our attention on reducing 
the risk of this happening but a relatively small 
number of these pollution incidents occur. We are 
pleased that the number of more serious category 
1 and 2 pollution incidents remains low at 2, 
down from 9 in 2016. One was related to a sewer 
near a watercourse and the other from our water 
distribution network. The number of category 3 
incidents remained broadly stable and well below 
our PC. We continue to proactively self-report a 
high proportion of incidents to the EA, 80% in 
2019, assisted by our Water Rangers programme.

This performance has been achieved as a result 
of our transformative pollution management 
programme. We are continuously learning and 
improving our pollution performance through our 
company-wide zero-tolerance approach. Our 
focus is to constantly examine all aspects of 
pollution through our Pollution Best Practice 
Group and target our efforts to effectively reduce 
the number of incidents. We have published a 
Pollution Incident Reduction Plan on our website, 
setting out our ongoing commitment to reducing 
pollution incidents further to 2025.

BATHING WATER QUALITY 
COMPLIANCE

Our bathing waters in the NW region continue to 
be amongst the cleanest in the country. Our aim 
is to contribute to all of the region’s bathing 
waters being categorised as ‘Sufficient’ or better 
by the EA, working in partnership to make this 
happen as we recognise seawater quality can be 
affected by a number of sources, such as run-off 
from agriculture, urban pollution and from birds 
or animals.

“We help to improve the 
quality of rivers and 
coastal waters for the 
benefit of people, the 
environment and wildlife”

All bar one of our bathing waters achieved either 
the ‘Good’ or ‘Excellent’ standard, with 25 out of  
34 achieving the highest standard. However,  
one of our bathing waters, at Cullercoats in  
North Tyneside, was classified as ‘Poor’ for a 
second year.

We continue to work in partnership with the EA 
and local authority to understand the reasons for 
the localised decline in bathing water quality at 
Cullercoats. Since September 2017, an extensive 
investigation programme has been carried out 
that has ruled out a number of potential factors. 
This has included undertaking precautionary 
measures and remedial works on parts of our 
network together with the resolution of a  
number of third party issues. We remain 
committed to working with our partners to 
improve the seawater quality at Cullercoats, 
including investigatory investment in our PR19 
Business Plan.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

35

“We protect and enhance 
the environment in 
delivering our services, 
leading by example”

We are continually evolving our processes and 
continuing to work in partnership to attain 
the necessary sustainable improvements in 
river water quality, supporting a catchment-
based approach to managing the water 
environment. We are working within four 
catchment partnerships across the north east, in 
Northumberland, Tyne, Wear and Tees. 

We know that future permits will tighten as 
legislation changes. This will introduce new 
challenges and standards, as well as tightening 
existing permit standards, which will require us 
to adopt new treatment technologies and 
increases the emphasis on very efficient 
operational control.  We are also aware that the 
pressures of increasing population, new housing, 
industrial developments and climate change will 
challenge our performance.

SEWAGE TREATMENT WORKS 
DISCHARGE COMPLIANCE

The EA sets strict standards for effluent 
discharged into rivers, estuaries and the sea. 
These standards are specified in environmental 
permits for each of our sewage treatment works, 
taking into account what is required to protect 
the water quality and ecology of the rivers and 
bathing waters specific to our region. We have a 
very strong discharge compliance record, with 
zero failures in 2018, but were disappointed to 
have two discharge permit failures in 2019, 
against a challenging background of extreme 
weather events and third party impacts.

We are continuing our planning to meet future 
new and tighter consent standards and to satisfy 
our obligations in working towards meeting 
‘Good’ Water Framework Directive status in our 
rivers. To do this, we will build on our innovative 
operational management and early warning 
systems, TriM (trigger management system) and 
DRIVE (Dynamic Risk Index and Visit 
Effectiveness – see case study on page 36), a tool 
that allows us to understand real-time 
compliance risk across all of our treatment 
works. These systems have been adopted both at 
works with numeric permits and those with 
descriptive permits. Our operators are also 
intervening more frequently at our descriptive 
works in order to prevent permit non-compliance 
and potential resulting pollution incidents.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

36
36

DRIVE (DYNAMIC RISK 
INDEX AND INTERVENTION 
EFFECTIVENESS)

In a business where customer service levels and 
standards of service delivery performance are 
becoming increasingly demanding, at the same time 
as striving for industry-leading cost efficiency, we 
need to be much smarter at identifying, predicting 
and targeting resources towards risks in a much more 
measured and focused way.   

The result has been improved performance 
through industry-leading sewage treatment 
compliance as well as a 30% reduction in 
underlying risk score due to improved operational 
focus on specific issues.

The DRIVE framework has now been extended 
from wastewater treatment into water and 
wastewater networks and water supply to create 
a common approach to managing operational 
risk across the business.

We have always believed that most of the 
information we need to run our business is 
known to us. The challenge has been to capture it, 
determine when we need to act on it and identify 
who has the capacity and capability to carry out 
those actions.

Systems and processes are usually very capable 
of doing what they were designed to do in 
isolation. The challenge for our Drive project was 
to create an integrated business process which: 

 • identified the key operational measures from 

the vast amount of data points generated every 
second across our operational business;

 • combined these to create leading indicators at 

the asset and operational system level;

 • added asset health and criticality weightings to 
these measures to allow us to calculate risk;

 • created a single business view of where effort 
needs to be focused to address these risks 
before they impact on performance; and

 • communicated a clear enterprise-wide 

workflow to ensure that people understand 
their responsibilities to execute action plans to 
mitigate against these risks. 

The DRIVE approach has created a cultural 
change to clear, evidence-based decision making, 
with discussions based on asset failure rates and 
deterioration trends rather than individual 
judgements. The increased level of operational 
understanding has also reduced dependence on 
technical experts.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

37

Net Zero Emissions
In March our Chief Executive, Heidi Mottram 
opened an industry-wide conference, Water UK’s 
Delivering a Zero Carbon Water Sector 
conference. Representatives from across the 
sector came together to discuss the challenge 
and share experience as they work to deliver on a 
commitment to be net zero carbon by 2030. We 
have gone a step further and have set a challenge 
of achieving net zero carbon by 2027, three years 
ahead of the government target. In addition, we 
have committed to creating zero avoidable waste 
by 2025

In terms of carbon emissions, we are continuing 
to explore renewable energy opportunities 
through solar generation, pilots of large scale 
battery storage and the production of hydrogen in 
hydropower sites that cannot be connected to the 
grid. We have begun the process of turning our 
vehicle fleet green with the addition of our first 
electric vehicles and are investigating the use of 
biofuels, while we introduced a new system to 
help monitor and reduce the amount of travel we 
do. We are extending this to our supply chain, and 
have committed to increase the amount we 
spend in our operating areas to 60p in every 
pound, to reduce transportation, as well as 
supporting local economies.

Our commitment on waste will mean eliminating, 
re-using or recycling 90% of waste from 
operations, and working with partners to 
contribute to the circular economy in our regions.  
Our Innovation Festivals already operate on a 
zero waste basis, with no waste going to landfill, 
including all food waste being taken to a local 
anaerobic digestion plant to produce gas. 

CLIMATE CHANGE

The nature of our business, with our interaction 
with the natural environment, means that 
climate change presents particular challenges to 
us and our customers, and is one of the principal 
risks facing our business (see page 61). It also 
means we have significant potential to make a 
positive contribution to both climate change 
adaptation and mitigation. We have sought to 
realise that in the past year and in our future 
planning, facing up to the challenge of water 
resources becoming scarcer and demand 
increasing, as set out by EA Chief Executive Sir 
James Bevan in a series of speeches in 2019.

Ten years ago we committed to a carbon 
management plan with the aim of reducing our 
greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions by 35% by 2020 
against a 2008 baseline. We were delighted to 
achieve this goal ahead of schedule in 2018/19. 
This was achieved through a twin focus on 
energy efficiency and renewable energy 
generation.

Our focus on energy efficiency included investing 
in optimisation tools, such as Aquadapt, and the 
use of data analytics, site energy audits, trigger 
management and investment in energy efficient 
assets are all routinely applied to drive down our 
underlying consumption. In respect of renewable 
energy, we use 100% of the sludge remaining after 
sewage treatment to produce renewable energy at 
two thermal hydrolysis advanced anaerobic 
digestion plants and power all our sites using 
renewable electricity, including a long term 
commitment to offshore wind power.

In the last year we have installed over 500 new 
smart meters to help monitor energy usage at our 
treatment works and pumping stations, and 
implemented a new travel booking process to 
provide insight and support reducing business 
travel. We have also signed outline agreements 
with a third party to develop solar power at a 
number of our sites which will provide 
emissions-free, and lower cost, energy. 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

38

We are using innovation to manage flood risk, 
including utilising Digital Twin technology to 
assess how our assets will respond to extreme 
weather events, and deploying fibre-optic sensor 
technology enabling us to measure depth flow 
and temperature in our sewers, helping us to 
predict and resolve incidents before they occur.

We included in our PR19 business plan a 
programme to address properties which are at 
increased risk of sewer flooding for the first time 
due to climate change and the effect of urban 
creep. This is distinct from our base programme 
which is focused on preventing repeat flooding at 
properties which have experienced flooding 
previously and reflects strong customer support 
for a more proactive approach. This sewer 
flooding enhancement scheme forms another 
key part of our case at CMA. 

Resilience
Over the longer term, climate change could 
impact on water resources resilience and the 
integrity of our assets. Our Resilience Framework 
provides a structure for us to achieve resilience 
in the round by taking an integrated and 
systematic approach to understanding risk and 
resilience challenges across all of our business 
areas and how they interact. Resilience was a key 
element of our PR19 Business Plan.

Our Water Resource Management Plan has 
demonstrated that we have 100% security of 
supply index in all of our water resource zones 
across the full 40-year planning period. We have 
also demonstrated our resilience to a 1 in 200-
year drought scenario. 

In our southern operating area the completed 
expansion of Abberton Reservoir in 2014 provides 
further security in Essex. However, although our 
Essex region has robust water resource 
availability there are constraints, under certain 
circumstances, on our ability to move water to 
where it is required for treatment and 
distribution. In our PR19 Plan we proposed a new 
Essex transfer scheme that would provide 
additional flexibility and allow our two key 
reservoirs to be kept in balance. There was strong 
customer support for investing to enhance the 
resilience of supplies in this way and this scheme 
forms a key part of our case at CMA.

The security of supplies for customers in our 
North East operating area is largely due to the 
reserves available from Kielder Reservoir, and the 
flexibility provided by the Kielder Transfer 
System – a giant pipeline that can feed into the 
rivers Tyne, Wear and Tees. 

We recognise that this puts us in a position to 
contribute to resilience in neighbouring  
operating areas as well. We play a full part in  
both Water Resource East, which is pioneering a 
collaborative approach to water resources 
planning across Eastern England, and  
Water Resources North, protecting resilience  
and supporting sustainable growth in the 
Northern Powerhouse.

On the wastewater side, we are also using 
industry-leading approaches to reduce the risk of 
flooding. Our award-winning NIDP brings 13  
Lead Local Flood Authorities across the  
North East together with the EA to promote 
sustainable drainage.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

39

COMPETITIVENESS

FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE

INNOVATION FESTIVALS

We drive innovation all year round, but our 
festivals are the focal point. The events have 
become firmly-established as industry-wide and 
attract participants from across the globe. In 2019 
we had more than 3,000 people join us from 734 
organisations. This diversity represents a huge 
breadth and depth of experience that we would 
not be able to tap into in business as usual 
activities.  The professional services value of this 
contribution is estimated to be worth c.£5m.

Clearly the main purpose of the event is to create 
new ideas to improve our business. We also use it 
to rapidly progress existing ideas, or ‘a year’s 
worth of work in a week’. We have used this 
technique to great effect to drive forward ideas 
that require collaboration across organisational 
boundaries, such as the Common Underground 
Map.

The festival places us firmly at the epicentre of an 
innovation ecosystem. There are lots of spin offs 
from the event, many of which we get involved 
in, some of which happen without us. Our 
reputation for being innovative is enhanced 
either way. To date, our festivals have attracted 
over 6,000 participants generating 132 ideas back 
into the business. In 2019 we reached more 
people than ever with Twitter messaging, 
achieving a reach of 3.6m people.

In September 2019 we held a joint event, Innovate 
East, with Anglian Water over three days in 
Ipswich, a first of its kind for the industry. The 
event had its own character, but was broadly 
based on our Innovation Festival format. We 
embraced open innovation, attracting 
participants from over 250 organisations. We held 
nine sprints and three hacks within the context 
of four themes: leakage, social purpose, natural 
capital and digital twins.

The financial performance of the Company is 
detailed in the Financial Performance and 
Structure section later in this report.

“Our finances are sound, 
stable and achieve a 
fair balance between 
customers and investors”

INNOVATION

We believe that innovation is the process of 
turning ideas into business value, and that this is 
everyone’s responsibility. We have engaged with 
and empowered our people to develop a culture 
which is open to future change and the potential 
to improve the lives of our customers and the 
environment that we live and work in.

This year has seen the creation of a robust 
innovation pipeline and process which is 
enabling focus on the big challenges laid out in 
the business plan. Central to this are the 
innovation ambassadors that are enabling 
innovation across the business. These employees 
are spreading innovative culture across the 
business and driving the implementation of 
innovative new ideas so it becomes business as 
usual.

“We are an efficient and 
innovative company”

In 2019 we launched Amplify which is an idea 
management platform that is harnessing the 
creativity and expertise of our employees, our 
supply chain, eco-system and beyond. This is a 
challenge based approach so focus is on solving 
big challenges like reducing the use of single use 
plastics when there is an interruption to supply, 
increasing the number of customers on the 
priority register and how to reduce flooding by 
changing customer behaviours (see case study on 
page 32).

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT  40

•   NWG is a founder member of the national 

Digital Twin Hub. We are pleased to work with 
this group of developers, owners and users of 
digital twins to shape the national landscape 
and ensure that digital twins create value for 
our customers and stakeholders.

We also work closely in partnership with 
colleagues across the water and utilities sector, 
including playing an active role in UK Water 
Industry Research, which is chaired by our 
Wastewater Director, Richard Warneford.  
Through our membership of the Cross Utility 
Innovation Group (with Northern Gas Networks 
(NGN), Northern Powergrid and Yorkshire Water) 
we share knowledge and look for opportunities 
for collaboration to tackle shared needs on a 
regional basis.  Most recently, we partnered with 
the Energy Innovation Centre to run a series of 
open innovation challenges in collaboration with 
their other members. 

THE POWER OF 5G

In December 2019, we joined forces with telecoms 
partners and conducted a series of initial 5G trials 
to harness the power of 5G connectivity to 
revolutionise the way we operate. Across our 
business we require a range of technical skills 
and competencies in order to manage the 
logistical challenge of maintaining water in our 
supply areas and the wastewater services across 
the North East region. 5G-enabled augmented 
reality technology allows experienced 
technicians to remotely guide on the ground 
teams through complex tasks by relaying real-
time data and instructions. The technology also 
allows multiple experts to join one call 
simultaneously, adding valuable second opinions.

The first set of trials will focus on areas including 
a home water maintenance app, for consumers to 
monitor their home’s water supply and flow to 
identify any unusual patterns to flag potential 
issues ahead of time. We are also looking to use 
5G to power augmented reality to provide a 3D 
representation of buried assets for technicians 
and to allow field technicians and engineers to 
quickly access and upload crucial data from our 
central GIS database, without requiring a wi-fi or 
cable connection.

INVESTQUEST

It is important that our people have the 
opportunity to have their ideas listened to and we 
continued our InvestQuest competition, which 
allows our employees to say how they would use 
an investment of up to £250,000. For the best five 
ideas, the individuals and teams were given the 
opportunity to pitch their idea to a panel of 
directors in a ‘Dragon’s Den’ style.  The ideas 
covered a diverse range of subjects from 
improving customer complaint handling to an 
automatic flushing and probe system and 
generating more renewable energy from our 
anaerobic digesters. The winning idea was a 
mobile unit which would provide real time 
analysis data, and this is now being progressed 
into reality.

RESEARCH AND  
INNOVATION PARTNERSHIPS

We are at our best and most innovative when we 
combine our people and ideas with those from 
the outside world. Accordingly, we have built 
strong relationships with organisations and 
individuals to support our innovation initiatives. 
These innovation partnerships have given us 
early sight of latest thinking and product 
developments. Some examples of our activities 
over the last year are given below:

•   We regularly work with inventor in residence, 

Andrew Turner Innovation Limited, on a 
number of early stage proof of concept projects 
including a smart drain pipe, which slows 
down the flow of rain water from roofs into 
sewers, helping reduce the risk of flooding;

•   We are collaborating with Wordnerds, applying 
artificial intelligence to linguistics to help us to 
interpret how our customers feel about their 
experience of NWL, particularly when we are 
reading written comments and feedback on 
social media;

•   Our partnership with Durham University has 

continued with our Innovate UK-funded 
Knowledge Transfer Partnership, which is 
working with affected people to increase flood 
resilience in their communities;

•   We have also continued our partnership with 

Newcastle University with the appointment of 
a post-graduate research engineer to 
investigate the role of green infrastructure in 
reducing urban flood risk, and the expansion of 
the BE:WISE wastewater research facility at our 
Birtley sewage treatment works;

•  Our work on Digital Twins has also continued 
apace, focusing on developing digital twins of 
water supply systems and biogas production;

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

41
41

GLOBAL INNOVATION 
PLATFORM LAUNCHED

It is very important to us to work with and share best 
practise where we can. A lot of problems are better 
solved together and our Innovation Festival is a great 
example of how we bring many people, companies 
and industries together to look at big problems. 

As part of this we have launched a new ideas 
sharing platform ‘Amplify’, opening the 
innovation floodgates to the whole world.

Amplify is a shared space where anybody from 
across the globe can come together to help solve 
big problems, pitch new ideas and innovate 
together. We post a series of big real life 
challenges and then open them up to the rest of 
the world to try and help solve them. As well as 
work on these problems, people can suggest 
ideas, pitch their products, ask questions and 
interact with other innovators and creators all 
within the Amplify website. 

Each challenge is owned by an expert from the 
company and they monitor responses, engage 
with users and pick up and run with the most 
promising ones. There is potential financial 
backing and funding to develop and trial the best 
ideas and anyone can register and take part in 
the challenges.

At the launch, our Head of Innovation, Angela 
MacOscar, said: “We believe whole-heartedly in 
open innovation. We love new ideas that will 

make a difference to our customers’ lives and 
when we find them, we will back them 
completely. We’ve seen the benefits of breaking 
the rules, doing things differently and innovating 
outside of the box. That’s why we’re so excited 
about Amplify, the newest tool that will allow us 
to connect with every innovator and creative 
mind from across the world and to work together 
to solve big problems.”

Over the years we’ve heard from lots of small and 
medium sized companies and inventors who say 
they struggle to get their ideas off the ground or 
in front of big companies like ours. This is the 
perfect opportunity.

Our first challenge was based around reducing 
single use plastics. Specifically, how the water 
company can eliminate the use of plastic bottles 
when providing emergency water supplies to 
customers during an interruption.

Anyone interested in taking part in our 
challenges should visit amplifynwg.co.uk and 
register on the website to join the discussion.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT  42

“Our people are talented, 
committed and inspired  
to deliver great services  
to customers”

In 2019, we used the GPTW employee survey for 
the first time. This provides an opportunity for 
employees to tell us how they feel about working 
here. Managers receive the results for their teams 
and involve employees in creating local action 
plans. The change in survey provider meant that 
we also revised our target measure to achieving a 
Trust Index score of 65% or more, which we only 
just missed.

In December 2019, we asked the Great Place to 
Work Institute to undertake a Best Workplaces 
comprehensive culture audit of the business. 
Their conclusions were “it is evident that NWG is 
an employee, customer and environmentally 
centric employer.” Two areas identified as being a 
particular strength included how we recruit and 
welcome new people into the business and the 
way we listen and collaborate. The audit has 
given us what we wanted, areas to focus on and 
different ideas to consider.  

We continue to be accredited as a Living Wage 
Employer with the Living Wage Foundation, 
which means that every employee in the 
Company earns at least the Living Wage, an 
hourly rate set independently and calculated 
according to the basic cost of living for the UK.

PEOPLE

GREAT PLACE TO WORK

Our aspiration is for all of our people, current and 
future, to have a great experience at work and to 
understand the part they play to achieve our 
purpose, vision, outcomes and to deliver 
unrivalled customer experience.  We aspire to 
have an inclusive and diverse culture where our 
people are supported by their managers, feel 
confident that their voice is heard and have a 
workplace where everyone can thrive and feel 
empowered to be the best they can be. We know 
from the 84% of employees that took part in our 
most recent employee survey that 72% of our 
people feel proud to work here.

“We are seen as a great 
place to work”

We have continued to develop our employee 
engagement through our GPTW programme, 
based on the four themes of My Voice, My 
Manager, Our Values and Our Shared Story. We 
engage with our employees through our 
Employee Relations Framework and through a 
range of communication channels including 
director roadshows, structured Teamtalk  
briefings every two months, our weekly H2info 
e-bulletin, and digital tools such as our intranet 
and Yammer.

Our annual employee roadshows provide an 
opportunity for our people to understand our 
vision and progress towards this. Our CEO, Heidi 
Mottram, attends all of the roadshow sessions 
with the relevant director allowing direct 
engagement with all staff.

It’s important that people understand the part 
they play to achieve our vision and outcomes. 
Our bi-monthly Teamtalk events ensure everyone 
comes together to discuss performance and key 
areas of focus. After a session with our CEO, our 
leaders cascade to their teams with the support 
of a pack including videos and interactive 
activities to bring the message to life.  In 2019 we 
held a ‘Teamtalk Takeover’ where the whole 
session was focused on our customer service and 
the change from SIM to C-MeX.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT  43

Apprenticeship programmes have given 110 of 
our existing employees the opportunity to learn 
and grow during 2019. Some have been learning 
about data intelligence to help maximise the 
strategic and operational benefits from the 
increasing data that technology gives us access 
to and use their new skills on business 
improvement projects. Others have focused on 
management or water engineering. 

For some of our Water production team, their 
personal development has resulted in NWL being 
the first in the water industry to achieve the 
Licence to Operate Standards for competence. 
These Standards are recognised by DWI as 
demonstrating that our people are competent to 
provide clean, clear water to our customers every 
day. Many of the people involved in the 
programme have been working in their roles for 
many years and after completing the programme 
their understanding of the science and 
engineering behind why they do what they do 
has equipped them to take their contribution in 
the business to another level and their hard work 
has resulted in a qualification they can all be 
proud of.

Our involvement with other utility sector 
organisations in a Procurement Skills Accord 
ensures that we look wider than just our own 
people and help address sector-wide skills gaps 
and shortages to improve the future as well as the 
present.  Our contribution is audited each year, 
including how we promote relevant skills 
development across our supply chain through our 
procurement process.  

We continue to look for ways we can develop and 
support our managers to be the best they can be 
and build trusted relationships with their teams. 
Our Leadership and Management Development 
Programme for all new people managers within 
the Company has continued to evolve to meet 
business needs. This has been designed to 
provide our managers with a foundation of 
excellence in their leadership roles and aims to 
enable our managers to lead and manage their 
people with confidence whilst delivering a great 
place to work and unrivalled customer 
experiences for our internal and external 
customers.

OUR VALUES AND BEHAVIOURS

Our employee awards scheme, known as ViVa 
(Vision and Values), is our way of saying thank 
you to our employees for doing a great job or 
going the extra mile. Now in its ninth year it is 
still as popular as ever with circa 1,700 employees 
in 2019 nominating teams and colleagues for 
demonstrating our values and behaviours. 
Anyone can nominate anyone in the business 
that they feel have done a particularly great job or 
have gone the extra mile. Prizes are awarded 
each month to the top nominations and every 
year we hold a ViVa awards ceremony to 
celebrate the best across the five categories.

Our overall winners were the Planning and 
Scheduling (south) team for the One Team 
support they provided to two colleagues who 
suffered a serious accident while on holiday.  
Special recognition was made to the Leakage 
team who used a range of innovative approaches 
to deal with extremely challenging weather 
conditions and still meet our leakage targets for 
2018/19, and laid the groundwork to deliver our 
targets again in 2019/20.

“Our people act in line 
with our values”

We developed ‘Our Behaviours’ with our people 
across the Company to identify the behaviours 
we all need to demonstrate to enable us to 
achieve our medium-term goals and deliver our 
vision of being national leader. We have 
continued to embed these through our annual 
appraisal process and midyear reviews and using 
our Leadership behaviours to inform our 
recruitment and selection process including 
shortlisting and interviews.

NWG ACADEMY

We recognise that our people are our greatest 
asset and we are committed to making sure that 
people have the opportunity to develop, have the 
chance to achieve their goals potential and make 
a difference. Our NWG Academy is a strategy and 
plan of activities to ensure we have the skills, 
knowledge and talent we need to continue to give 
our customers the service they expect and 
deserve, sustainably. NWG Academy activities are 
focused to raise our profile as an industry and an 
employer with the future workforce, develop the 
talent already in the business to ensure everyone 
is fit for the future and retain knowledge as 
people retire.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT  44

DIVERSITY AND EQUAL OPPORTUNITIES

We recognise the value and importance of diversity and inclusion in our workforce. Our customers 
come from a wide range of backgrounds, and our workforce needs to reflect that.

Research shows that diverse organisations consistently perform better, attracting great people, 
making better decisions and successfully innovating and evolving. If we are to achieve our vision, we 
need to grasp this opportunity for improving performance through creating an environment where all 
our people can be themselves and do their very best each day.

GENDER DIVERSITY AT 31 MARCH 2020

NAME

Board

Executive Leadership Team (ELT)

Full company

FEMALE

2

6

1,005

MALE

9

6

2,079

We operate in an environment where traditional 
perceptions of careers and roles persist and 
whilst we work hard to attract people from 
diverse backgrounds, our business is currently 
predominantly male. We are committed to 
improving our gender balance and are taking 
positive steps to ensure that our roles are 
attractive to women as well as men. We’ve used 
social media to demonstrate that the water 
industry is a place where females can add real 
value across all roles, and our #waterwomen 
campaign to focus on the themes we know from 
research are important to women.

One area of success has been recruitment to our 
development programmes where 67% of our 
undergraduates in 2019 were female, the majority 
involved in science, technology, engineering and 
maths roles, and 33% of apprentices, despite most 
of their roles being operational. 

To encourage more applications from people with 
different personal characteristics and to make 
sure they are comfortable to be themselves at 
work with us, we have partnered with Vercida to 
develop an attraction strategy to raise our profile 
amongst ethnic minorities and with Stonewall to 
better access and support the LGBT community. 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT  45

and it is our intention that all job applicants and 
employees are treated equally, regardless of their 
age, ability, marital or partnership status, race, 
religion or belief, gender or sexual orientation.

We welcome employment applications from 
people with disabilities and, where existing 
employees develop disabilities, they are 
supported to remain in employment, wherever 
practicable, by providing appropriate adjustments 
to their roles and/or effective redeployments. 
Occupational health physicians assist this 
process with professional medical advice. Our 
work with the North East Local Enterprise 
Partnership’s Special Educational Needs and 
Disabilities group and our involvement with 
Disability Confident is building our network  
and understanding to do more to find ways to 
offer work experience and create a pathway  
into employment.  

DIVERSITY AND EQUAL 
OPPORTUNITIES (continued)

To drive real change our relationships with 
external partners are really important to us. We 
work closely with the WISE (Women in Science 
and Engineering) campaign and the Energy and 
Utility Skills Partnership.  Being regional lead on 
the WISE North East Hub enables us to promote 
networking opportunities and highlight female 
role models, through collaboration with other 
local businesses. We were delighted to be 
awarded Employer of the Year at the 2019 North 
East Business Women of the Year Awards.

The objective of our Science, Technology, 
Engineering, Arts and Maths (STEAM) activities 
at the 2019 NWG Innovation Festival, the 
culmination of a year of outreach activity with 
schools, colleges and universities, was to 
encourage young people to seriously consider a 
STEAM career. Circa 1,300 young people joined in 
the fun and educational activities.  Women 
working in science, technology, engineering and 
maths careers in the region came to support and 
share their stories.

Our Equal Opportunity Policy seeks to ensure that 
all our current employees and potential 
employees are treated with respect. We welcome 
job applications from all parts of the community 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GENDER PAY GAP REPORT

NWG MEAN GENDER PAY GAP 2019

STRATEGIC REPORT  46

We are committed to the principle of equality of 
opportunity and equal treatment for all of our 
employees. We published our gender pay gap 
figures in our Gender Pay Report March 2020, 
which is available on our websites. We continue 
to make progress and our gender pay gap is 
reducing, but we are not complacent and we 
know that we have to do more to improve 
inclusion at all levels of our organisation.

The gender pay gap is the difference between the 
average hourly pay for all the men and women 
working for the same organisation. It’s not the 
same as equal pay, which is about a man and 
woman receiving the same pay for performing 
the same or a similar job.

The mean gender pay gap is the percentage 
difference in the average hourly pay for women 
compared to men. The median pay gap is the 
difference between the hourly pay rate for the 
median woman compared to the median man.

Our mean and median pay gaps have reduced 
from 2018, and we are now below the ONS 
average. Although we are proud of our work on 
diversity, we know there is more we can do. We 
remain committed to meaningful and sustainable 
change, through understanding the underlying 
issues, enabling progression and development for 
all colleagues who want it, and to make sure we 
access the best talent possible.

We are constantly working to make NWL a great 
place to work. That includes creating a 
framework for an inclusive and diverse workforce 
who are supported by our benefits programme. 
We will continue to update on our progress and 
policies to support this.

Over the next year, we will focus on:

 • Providing more coaching and mentoring;

 • Continuing to ensure that, wherever possible, 
shortlists for senior roles have a balance of 
genders;

 • Utilising role models from inside and outside 
the business to inspire and support female 
talent;

 • Engaging in the wider conversation about 
equality in the Utility sector, through our 
involvement in initiatives such as EU Skills; 
and

 • Focusing on departments where gender 

balance is more challenging.

Our Mean gender pay gap has reduced by 5% on 
last year.

NWG MEAN BONUS GAP 2019

7.7%

-42.6%

NWG MEDIAN GENDER PAY GAP 2019

We are now below the ONS figure of 17.3%.

NWG MEDIAN BONUS GAP 2019

16.8%

0%

PROPORTION OF MEN AND WOMEN 
PAID A BONUS

23.2%

25.9%

Females

Males

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT  47

PAY QUARTILES BY GENDER

BAND D

BAND A

All employees whose standard hourly rate places 
them at or below the lower quartile.

All employees whose standard hourly rate places 
them above the upper quartile.

383

783

400

572

783

211

BAND B

All employees whose standard hourly rate places 
them at or below median but above the lower 
quartile.

OVERALL TOTAL

544

783

239

2117

3132

1015

BAND C

All employees whose standard hourly rate places 
them above median but at or below the upper 
quartile.

Females

Males

618

783

165

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
HEALTH AND SAFETY

WELLBEING

STRATEGIC REPORT  48

We are committed to providing an environment 
where people can maintain good physical and 
mental health and make informed lifestyle 
choices. Our ‘Live Well, Work Well, Be Well’ health 
and wellbeing programme continues to evolve 
and is driven by our top reasons for absence and 
feedback we receive from employees. As part of 
our annual wellbeing calendar we hold wellbeing 
challenges for individuals or teams focusing on 
physical (weight loss and physical activity) and 
mental (energy and resilience) challenges, as well 
as quarterly wellbeing weeks and monthly 
awareness campaigns.

Our network of Wellbeing Champions support our 
people by ensuring their teams are aware of our 
internal wellbeing support such as our Employee 
Assistance Programme for mental health and our 
Physiotherapy service for physical health. We 
have continued our focus on mental health and 
over the last year have trained over 30 Mental 
Health First Aiders across the business to support 
people who may be struggling with their mental 
health. We have also started a new programme 
for all people managers to receive mental health 
awareness training to equip them to have 
conversations with their people and spot signs 
and symptoms, and personal resilience 
workshops are available to all employees.

It is our aspiration and ethical responsibility to 
make sure that everyone goes home safe every 
day, which extends to our employees, supply 
chain partners and customers. Our Safety 
performance improved significantly on the 
previous year and we experienced our longest 
period of time - almost 100 days - without having 
a lost time accident.

To have a truly safe organisation we need to get 
four fundamental things right. We need safe 
people, a safe way of doing things, safe places and 
we need to keep on learning. These are all vital 
components of our safety plan to encourage safe 
behaviour and help us achieve our aspiration of 
Everyone Home Safe Every Day.

“Our workplaces are 
healthy and safe”

We continued to work on our safety awareness 
within the business and our people carried out 
almost 30,000 ‘60 second checks’, a huge increase 
compared to the previous year. We encourage 
employees to have safety conversations to not 
only stop unsafe behaviour but also as a positive 
indicator when someone is doing something 
right, and completed 3,221 safety conversations 
last year.

We also extended our programme of managers’ 
safety visits, completing over 1,000 in the year. 
This shows that our managers are visible and 
looking at what’s working well and finding out 
what we can do better on our sites. It also 
encourages employees to talk about safety and 
discuss any issues, concerns or ideas on how to 
improve safety on sites.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT  49
STRATEGIC REPORT  49

THE POWER OF Z

We have invented a simple but innovative tool which 
helps measures the depth of underground water 
pipes, to keep our workers safe and speed up the 
regions’ roadworks in future. 

The ‘Z stick’ idea was first discussed at our 
Innovation Festival back in July 2019, to help 
workers capture and record the depth of 
underground water and sewer pipes across  
our networks.

Paddy Garrett our Asset Systems Team Leader, 
said: “It’s more important than ever that we know 
the depth of our pipes, underneath our pavements 
and roads the space is being over crowded with 
the ever-increasing number of fibres and cables. 
We already know the width and the height, 
otherwise known as the X and Y position, of our 
assets, but this will help us measure the Z 
position, and that’s how the Z stick was born.”

The Z stick, is a colour-coded stick which, when 
placed into open excavations, helps to indicate to 
our teams how deeply a pipe is buried. The blue, 
green and red coloured bands on the tool 
categorise the excavation as either shallow, 
normal or deep and this information is being 
measured and recorded from over 2,000 locations 
as part of a pilot project. The data is used to 
develop and recalibrate a 3D model of the entire 
15,000km long network of water pipes.

This information will keep our people safe by 
helping them to avoid accidental strikes to live 
cables. It will enable us to despatch teams to  
jobs knowing in advance of any specialist 
equipment they may need to help dig and locate 
the pipe safely and quickly, and complete the 
work faster and potentially with less disruption 
for our customers.

This shows that innovation comes in all different 
shapes and sizes and it’s not just about utilising 
the latest new technology. Thanks to the Z stick, 
our aim is that in future, any field worker or 
planner about to dig, would be able to know 
accurately how deep the network is at any  
one point.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

50

COMMUNITIES

We know it is important to our customers that we 
support our local communities and is something they 
want us to do.

We know we can have a positive impact on our 
communities and their success. It is important to 
us to contribute to the economic wellbeing of the 
areas we serve and essential we make a wider 
contribution to life within our regions to support 
this.

We use our skills, assets and experience to 
support communities in areas that our customers 
have told us are most important to them. Our 
activities have a ‘ripple effect’, going far beyond 
our direct investment through trade with local 
suppliers to benefit our regional economies. We 
see ourselves as part of our communities and 
over the years we have developed an extensive 
community programme, that includes employee 
volunteering, supporting important local events, 
engaging and helping to educate young people 
around important issues and long standing 
partnerships that meet local community needs.

“We are proud to 
contribute to the success 
of local communities”

We are an integral part of the communities in 
which we operate. The health of our customers, 
their economic prosperity, and the surrounding 
environment all depend on how we deliver our 
services. Our reach into communities is 
extensive, and we benefit from being one of the 
few organisations to have a relationship with all 
of the households and businesses in our 
operating areas. We take this responsibility 
seriously, and our customers agree that we are an 
important part of the community. 

EMPLOYEE VOLUNTEERING

Our ‘Just an Hour’ employee volunteering scheme 
is very important to us and is something we are 
immensely proud of. Every year each of our team 
have the opportunity to give a minimum of 15 
working hours to support community initiatives. 
We know our communities can benefit from the 
wealth of knowledge, skills and expertise our 
employees have to give. The programme is 
designed to have an impact on education, the 
environment and the general wellbeing of the 
community. In 2019, 42% of our people 
volunteered their time supporting 989 
organisations across our communities.

POWERED BY WATER 

Our Powered by Water campaign has been 
running for many years, and is designed to teach 
young people the importance of staying well 
hydrated and avoiding sugary drinks in an 
engaging and fun way through our sporting 
partnerships. Thousands of young people across 
our supply areas, have benefited from the 
interactive educational workshop delivered with 
our partners Newcastle Eagles Community 
Foundation, MFC Foundation in Teesside, 
Foundation of Light in Sunderland, Essex Cricket 
Foundation and Mowden Park Rugby Club in 
Darlington. In 2019 over 27,500 young people 
participated in a Powered by Water workshop, 
with many more having the opportunity to take 
part in 2020.

WATER RANGERS 

Our award-winning Water Rangers initiative, set 
up in 2014, consists of trained customer 
volunteers who act as our eyes and ears on the 
ground in the community and raise awareness of 
any issues spotted on regular patrols along our 
waterways. River guardians and catchment 
partners also report any issues they see when 
working in the water environment. In 2019  
our volunteer Water Rangers carried out over  
2,000 patrols.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
BRANCH OUT 

COMMUNITY PARTNERSHIPS

STRATEGIC REPORT 

51

We look beyond our annual finance and 
performance reporting and also report on our 
influence and impact in the wider economy, the 
environment and society in Our Contribution 
report, which is available on our websites. Some 
of the highlights are shown below.

 • 30,624 customers receiving support to make 

their bills more affordable;

 • £859,696 financial contribution to 

environmental, community and charitable 
non-governmental organisations;

 • 989 organisations supported;

 • 42% of our people volunteered to support 
community projects giving 13,992 hours;

 • 13,000 young people supported through our 

employability activity;

 • over 1,200 ‘Refill Stations’;

 • 12,000 people given access to clean water and 

sanitation through our fundraising for 
WaterAid;

 • over 850,000 visitors to our historical and 

ecological sites; and

 • over 2,000 patrols by 78 water ranger volunteers 

to help protect our rivers.

Our Branch Out fund helps to deliver projects that 
benefit the natural environment and their local 
communities. A healthy natural environment is 
essential for us today and to make sure we can 
continue to supply top quality drinking water and 
safely remove wastewater in the future. In 
2019/20 we supported 21 Branch Out projects 
providing £60,000 in funding. Since 2013, our 
Branch Out fund has supported 126 projects and 
invested over £470,000 which has been used to 
leverage 12 times that amount in funding into our 
regions. This has resulted in us being part of, and 
helping to enable, an amazing £5.6million 
investment in wildlife and people across our 
communities.

PARTNERSHIPS

Partnership working is an essential aspect of our 
approach as a water and wastewater provider. By 
working in partnership with other stakeholders, 
we are able to share the costs, risks and benefits 
of addressing the challenges and opportunities 
faced by our business, and together make a 
difference to our customers’ lives.

“We work in partnership 
towards common goals”

Our Partnership Strategy sets out how we work 
with those whose values align with ours to 
achieve the shared goals that are important to 
our customers. Our partnerships are governed 
through joint steering groups, codes of practice 
and charters. We are a trusted partner of local, 
national and global strategic partnerships, 
influencing water policy and regulation to be 
progressive and sustainable.

Many of those partnerships have been described 
elsewhere in this report, such as our customer 
affordability partnerships, with StepChange and 
NEA, and our catchment partnerships on page 27.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

52
52

WORKING TOGETHER FOR 
THE FUTURE OF WATER

Water Resources East (WRE) was officially established 
as a not for profit, independent company back in 
June 2019.

The focus of WRE is simple; recognising the 
impact that climate change and population 
growth will continue to have on Eastern 
England′s finite water supply, combined with the 
need to enhance the environment in this region.

WRE is one of five regional water resource 
planning groups working as part of the EA′s 
development of a national framework for water 
resource management, but is the first to set itself 
up as an independent legal entity. This has been 
formed by a collaborative partnership comprising 
Anglian Water; Affinity Water; Cambridge Water; 
Essex and Suffolk Water; Severn Trent Water; the 
National Farmers′ Union; RWE Generation; 
Lincolnshire County Council; Suffolk Growth 
Programme Board (on behalf of all Local 
Authorities in Suffolk) and Norfolk County 
Council. Other organisations are expected to join 
over the coming months.

Eliane Algaard, our Water Director said: “We are 
excited to be a part of WRE and looking forward 
to working in collaboration with the other water 
companies and organisations going forward. We 
know we face some significant challenges in the 
East such as responding to climate change and 

population growth, but there are also 
opportunities to protect and enhance our water 
supply and benefit the wider region. It makes 
sense for water companies to come together in 
this way to achieve our common goals and 
deliver positive solutions for our customers.”

The next phase of WRE′s work will focus on the 
delivery of pilot projects within water-stressed 
catchments in the region. These pilots will focus 
on the links between land management and 
water management and will seek to maximise 
and account for environmental and Natural 
Capital benefits.

As part of one set of pilots, land owners will be 
encouraged to develop multi-sector water storage 
reservoirs, capturing excess water from winter 
rainfall and floods. This water could then be used 
to benefit the whole regional economy to bolster 
the regions water supply, support agriculture, 
enhance fenland conservation and reduce flood 
risk. These new reservoirs will be supported by 
further interconnecting pipes to enable water to 
be moved around the region, irrespective of water 
company boundaries.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

53

The report shows that most customers were 
generally satisfied with the service they received, 
however we know our customers’ expectations 
are rising, along with those of our stakeholders, 
shareholders and regulators. This report gives us 
the opportunity to see how we are performing 
against other companies and gives us an insight 
into what our customers opinion is and their 
perception of the service they receive from us.

BiTC’s RESPONSIBLE BUSINESS 
TRACKER®

The BiTC Responsible Business Tracker is a 
measurement tool that allows organisations to 
fairly assess and benchmark their responsible 
business performance within communities and 
the environment. Last year we were one of the 
first companies to take part in the Tracker in its 
pilot year. This year we were one of 94 companies 
across all 24 different sectors taking part. We are 
delighted to report that we scored 81% overall, 
meaning that we are leading our Energy and 
Utilities benchmark group and the cohort as a 
whole in responsible business practice, including 
healthy ecosystems and net zero carbon.

The national insights report has been published 
which summarises the key findings and best 
practice examples from the 2019/20 Tracker cycle 
and what they could mean in the context of the 
Covid-19 pandemic.

www.bitc.org.uk/report/2019-20-responsible-
business-tracker-insights-report

REPUTATION

TRUST

Our reputation is extremely important to us and 
we are proud to have again been named as one of 
the ‘most ethical companies’ in the world by the 
Ethisphere institute. Ethisphere promotes best 
practices for ethics and compliance globally, 
recognising companies for transparency and 
standards of integrity. We’re the only water 
company in the world to be included in this year’s 
World’s Most Ethical Company list and one of 
only four UK based companies on the list. 

We have worked hard to give our customers a 
high level of trust and confidence in our 
governance and assurance arrangements. We 
published Our Assurance Plan for 2019/20, 
following consultation with customers and 
stakeholders, setting out how we intend to meet 
our obligations and commitments and providing 
information of appropriate quality. We have 
published a Data Assurance Summary as part of 
our suite of annual reporting which describes 
what assurance we have carried out on our data 
reporting any key findings. This confirms that 
that there were no significant issues to report.

Our assurance framework builds upon our 
company-wide accreditation to: ISO 14001 
Environmental Management; ISO 55001 Asset 
Management and our sampling and laboratory 
analysis accreditation to the demanding ISO 
17025.

“We are a company that 
customers can trust”

WATER MARK

CCWater has introduced its Water Mark 
assessment, using previously published 
information on customers’ views, complaint 
numbers and operational performance to 
highlight how companies are performing in a 
simple table. Every area of performance, 
including trust, has been assessed and graded 
and companies have been ranked to show overall 
performance. 

In our Northumbrian area we were 1st of the 11 
water and sewerage companies and in our Essex 
and Suffolk area we were 8th for water only 
companies. We will look at the previous reports 
that were combined in this assessment so we can 
better understand the scoring and see where the 
differences are between the two areas. 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

54

FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE 
AND STRUCTURE

GROUP STRUCTURE

NWL is a wholly owned subsidiary of 
Northumbrian Water Group Limited (NWGL). 
NWGL has one other direct subsidiary, NWG 
Commercial Solutions Limited, which acts as a 
holding company for other non-regulated trading 
companies. NWGL also owns 50% of a joint 
venture company, Wave Ltd. which, through its 
trading subsidiary, carries out Non-household 
(NHH) retail activities in England and Scotland.

Note 25 describes the Company’s relationship 
with CK Hutchison Holdings Limited (CKHH). The 
Company has been informed by CKHH that, by 
virtue of contractual arrangements entered into 
with other parties, with effect from 30 December 
2019 it ceased to have a controlling interest in the 

Company as defined by the applicable accounting 
standards.

The chart below shows the structure of the Group 
and the upstream links to CKHH as at 31 March 
2020. The chart shows the principal intermediate 
holding companies, which are wholly owned 
unless otherwise shown. The 40%/40%/20% split 
above NWGL represents the  economic rights of 
Business Thrive Limited (BTL), CK Infrastructure 
Holdings Limited (CKI) and Li Ka Shing 
Foundation Limited under NWGL’s Articles of 
Association.

CKHH, CKI, BTL and NWGL have provided 
Ultimate Controller undertakings to the Company 
in accordance with the provisions of the 
Company’s Instrument of Appointment (Licence).

CK Hutchison Holdings Limited*

Hutchison 
Infrastructure 
Holdings Limited

c.72%

Business Thrive 
Limited

CK Infrastructure 
Holdings Limited*

Li Ka Shing 
Foundation Limited

40%

40%

20%

Northumbrian 
Water Group 
Limited

Northumbrian  
Water Limited

NWG Commercial 
Solutions Limited

financing 
subsidiaries

trading 
subsidiaries

* Companies listed on The Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited.

50%

Wave Ltd

trading 
subsidiary

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE 

The financial KPIs we report in our balanced 
scorecard on page 23 reflect the financial 
covenants underpinning our committed bank 
facilities and regulatory gearing, which are 
reported to each Board meeting. These KPIs all 
remained better than the target for the year.

The Company’s income statement, statement of 
comprehensive income, balance sheet, statement 
of changes in equity and cash flow statement are 
set out on pages 106 to 110. The Financial 
Statements have been prepared on an historical 
cost basis in accordance with Financial 
Reporting Standard (FRS) 101, reflecting 
International Financial Reporting Standards 
(IFRS) with reduced disclosures. The key 
accounting policies are summarised in note 1 to 
the Financial Statements on pages 111 to 118. A 
new accounting standard, IFRS 16 Leases, was 
adopted in the year and the impact of transition 
to the new standard is explained in note 1(r).

Revenue was £900.4m for the year ended 31 
March 2020 (31 March 2019: £869.1m). This reflects 
an increase in wholesale charges, set in line with 
the revenue allowance from the FD of price 
controls for 2015-20, which increased by a ‘K 
factor’ of 0.1% plus Retail Prices Index (RPI) 
inflation of 3.2%, and an increase in non-
regulated revenue related to the recovery of costs 
under the Kielder Water Resources Operating 
Agreement (WROA).

Operating costs, including capital maintenance 
costs, for the year ended 31 March 2020 were 
£541.6m (31 March 2019: £530.3m). The increase of 
£11.3m includes a provision of £6.5m to reflect 
additional bad debt risk on household revenue as 
a result of the economic impact of the Covid-19 
pandemic on our customers, and increases in 
staff salaries and depreciation charges from 
capital investment programme, partially offset by 
cost efficiencies.

Net interest payable was £112.4m in the year 
ended 31 March 2020 (31 March 2019: £130.9m). 
The reduction of £18.5m relates to lower accretion 
on index-linked bonds, and smaller adverse 
movements on the market valuation of 
derivatives compared to the previous year. Profit 
before taxation for the year ended 31 March 2020 
was £246.4m (31 March 2019: £207.9m).

The current tax charge for the year ended 31 
March 2020 was £38.9m (31 March 2019: £33.6m). 
The increase in the charge mainly reflects higher 
profit before tax. The deferred tax charge for the 
year ended 31 March 2020 was £58.9m (31 March 
2019: £5.5m). The significant increase in the 
charge is due primarily to a restatement of 
deferred tax from 17% to 19%. This reflected the 
decision by government to reverse the planned 
reduction to 17% which had been previously 

STRATEGIC REPORT 

55

enacted. Further details of the net tax charge are 
provided in note 7 to the Financial Statements. 
Profit for the year ended 31 March 2020 was 
£148.6m (31 March 2019: £168.8m).

A final dividend of £65.0m for the year ended 31 
March 2019 was paid in April 2019 and that 
comprised the total of dividends paid in the year 
ended 31 March 2020 (31 March 2019: £130.0m). No 
dividends have been proposed, approved or paid 
in respect of the year ended 31 March 2020. The 
dividend policy, and how the policy has been 
applied in the year, is explained in note 8 to the 
Financial Statements.

CAPITAL INVESTMENT

Total fixed asset additions in the year ended 31 
March 2020 were £280.4m (31 March 2019: 
£279.5m). Around £187m of this investment 
related to the maintenance of our asset base to 
ensure the continued provision of sustainable 
water and wastewater services in the areas we 
serve. In addition we have continued to enhance 
our asset base, in particular to reduce the risk of 
sewer flooding, to improve water and wastewater 
treatment compliance and to support new 
development activity in our areas of operation.

Significant investments in the year included the 
successful first phase of implementation of new 
systems under our iAM programme, for 
wastewater network and for water network in 
ESW, and progress on the upgrade of Horsley 
water treatment works, which serves Newcastle. 
We also completed our second gas to grid plant at 
Bran Sands.

CAPITAL STRUCTURE AND LIQUIDITY

The Company’s long-term debt structure 
remained largely unchanged with 61% fixed at an 
average rate of 4.44%, 38% index-linked at an 
average real rate of 1.27% and 1% on a variable 
rate basis, after allowing for hedging instruments. 
The slight increase in index-linked debt reflected 
the £100m Consumer Prices Index (CPI) linked 
issuance, described below. The blended average 
nominal rate for the Company for the year ended 
31 March 2020 was 4.22% (31 March 2019: 4.19%).

Our committed five year bank facility of £450m, 
which is for the purpose of maintaining general 
liquidity, was undrawn at 31 March 2020. During 
the year, the maturity date of this facility was 
extended to December 2024.

In July 2019, the Company placed its first CPI-
linked issuance, as a UK private placement 
through its financing subsidiary Northumbrian 
Water Finance plc (NWF). This was issued at a 
principal of £100m on a forward settlement basis 
for a tenor of 20 years, with a coupon of CPI plus 
0.242%.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

56

Interest rate risk
The Company finances its operations through  
a mixture of retained profits and borrowings.  
It borrows at both fixed and variable rates of 
interest and, on occasion, uses derivatives to 
generate the desired interest profile and to 
manage its exposure to interest rate fluctuations. 
The Company’s policy is to keep a minimum  
50% of its borrowings at fixed rates of interest.  
At 31 March 2020, 61% (31 March 2019: 63%) of the 
borrowings of the Company were at fixed rates of 
interest. Index-linked borrowings are treated as 
variable rate debt.

Credit risk
The Company invests surplus cash with banks on 
a short-term basis. The treasury policy specifies 
which counterparties the Company can invest 
with and sets a limit for the maximum exposure 
to each counterparty. These limits take account 
of published credit ratings. There is no material 
customer credit risk as no individual customer 
accounts for a significant proportion of income or 
debt. Note 1(o) of the Financial Statements sets 
out the Company’s bad debt policy.

Foreign currency risk
The Company’s policy is that any foreign 
currency exposure in excess of £100,000 sterling 
equivalent of a transactional nature, or £3m 
sterling equivalent of a translation nature, should 
be covered as soon as they are identified. At 31 
March 2020, the Company had forward foreign 
exchange contracts of £1.8m (31 March 2019: 
£4.3m) for the purpose of hedging the foreign 
currency risk of committed future purchases.

Market price risk
The Company’s exposure to market price risk 
principally comprises interest rate exposure. The 
Company’s policy is to accept a degree of interest 
rate risk. On the basis of the Company’s analysis, 
it is estimated that a 1% rise in interest rates 
would not have a significant effect.

The gearing KPI, which is measured per the 
financial covenant for the committed facility and 
excludes loans receivable, increased slightly from 
67.2% to 67.8%, remaining well within target. 
Interest cover improved from 3.6 to 4.0, also 
remaining comfortably better than target. 
Regulatory gearing was 67.2%, also below our 
target level of 70.0%.

The Company retains strong investment grade 
credit ratings of BBB+ (negative outlook) from 
Standard & Poor’s (S&P) and Baa1 (negative 
outlook) from Moody’s. The Moody’s outlook 
reflects its view on the gearing level of our parent 
company, NWGL, whilst recognising the strength 
of the regulatory ring-fence. Moody’s has 
extended the review period pending the outcome 
of the CMA review process. S&P updated its 
outlook to CreditWatch negative to reflect the 
uncertain outcome of the CMA review. We report 
on our financial resilience in our viability 
statement on pages 102 to 103. 

TREASURY POLICIES

The Board is responsible for the financing 
strategy of the Company which is determined 
within treasury policies set by NWGL. The 
treasury policies set out how the risks associated 
with treasury activities are managed, which are 
summarised below. On occasion, derivatives are 
used as part of this process, but the treasury 
policy prohibits their use for speculation.

Funding risk
The level of capital expenditure which NWL is 
obliged to incur is such that we cannot be wholly 
cash financed by internally generated sources. As 
a result, we must rely upon raising additional 
finance on a regular basis, to be principally used 
to fund the long-term assets required by the 
regulated business. In order to raise this finance 
efficiently, the Board’s aim is to retain prudent 
investment grade credit ratings. A reduction in 
the credit rating would likely restrict future 
sources of funding, increase the associated cost 
of new borrowing and prompt discussions with 
the European Investment Bank (EIB) about the 
existing facilities in place.

Liquidity risk
The Company’s policy is to have available 
standby committed bank borrowing facilities 
with a value of no less than £50m and with a 
bank agreement availability period of no less 
than three months. At 31 March 2020, NWL had 
£450m (31 March 2019: £440m) of undrawn bank 
facilities, provided by a group of five key 
relationship banks, which mature in 2024.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

57

RISK REPORT

RISK MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK

The Board sets the tone for risk management 
within the Company, supported by the R&CSC, 
and determines the appropriate risk appetite. The 
Board’s view of acceptable risk is based on a 
balanced view of all of the risks in the operating 
environment and it aims to ensure an appropriate 
balance between risk aversion and opportunities. 
The Board’s approach to monitoring, managing 
and mitigating risk, and the work undertaken by 
the R&CSC during the year, is set out in the 
Governance Report.

Those risks in the departmental risk registers 
with a managed risk score above a defined 
threshold are classed as ‘significant risks’ and are 
reported in the Corporate Risk Register. This is 
reviewed monthly by the ELT and at each 
meeting of the R&CSC.

We define strategic risks as those which are 
foreseeable, but not with sufficient clarity to be 
assessed within the corporate risk model. These 
are captured in a Strategic Risk Register and a 
sub-group of the Board reviews these strategic 
risks annually, most recently in November 2019.

The ELT implements policies on risk 
management and internal control, ensuring that 
risks are appropriately controlled, managed and 
reported and that remedial action is taken as 
appropriate. The Company’s approach to risk 
management is set out in our Risk Management 
Framework, which has been endorsed by the 
R&CSC, and is managed through a corporate risk 
model.

The Risk Management Framework sets out our 
process for identifying, analysing and evaluating 
risk across the business. Risk champions within 
each area of the business co-ordinate the 
identification and assessment of risks for their 
area of responsibility and record these in a 
departmental risk register. Risk champions meet 
on a quarterly basis to share learning and ensure 
consistency of approach.

Each risk is assessed against defined likelihood 
and consequence criteria on both an unmanaged 
and managed basis, producing a risk score. The 
management controls and responsibilities are 
documented and the effectiveness of the control 
assessed. An assurance map details the external 
and internal assurance provided over the 
controls. We also set a target risk and, where this 
is below the current managed risk score, set out 
an action plan to achieve the desired risk 
reduction.

PRINCIPAL RISKS AND 
UNCERTAINTIES

The R&CSC, on behalf of the Board, carried out a 
robust assessment of the principal risks facing 
the Company, including those that would 
threaten its business model, future performance, 
solvency or liquidity, taking account of both the 
highest rated risks on our Corporate Risk Register 
and the Strategic Risk Register identified by the 
Sub-committee.

The conclusions of this assessment are 
summarised on the heat map below. This shows 
the current exposure of each of the principal risks 
and an indication of whether the risk is 
increasing, stable or reducing.  The table on pages 
59 to 63 then describes each of the principal risks 
in more detail, along with our approach to 
mitigating these risks. The risks are not set out in 
order of priority. These principal risks have also 
been considered in our assessment of financial 
resilience, as set out in our viability statement on 
pages 102 to 103.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
A. Health & Safety

B. Customer trust and confidence

C. Water service failure

D. Wastewater service failure

E. Impact of pandemic

F. Effect of climate change

G. Cyber security / 
     Information management

H. Regulatory and political 
     changes

I. Funding and liquidity

J. Pension contributions

K. Financial performance

STRATEGIC REPORT 

58

C

E

K

I

F

A

G

H

J

Operational

Financial

Compliance

Risk increasing

Risk stable

Risk decreasing

B

D

t
c
a
p
m

I

Likelihood

Impact of pandemic
The risk associated with a pandemic has been 
identified historically within the Company’s risk 
register but has not previously been considered to 
be a principal risk. This was because the impact 
had been considered to be relatively moderate.

However, the unprecedented impact of the 
Covid-19 pandemic and, in particular the 
lockdown measures implemented by 
government, has clearly demonstrated the 

potential scale and wide-ranging effect of such 
an occurrence. As a result, the R&CSC has 
decided that this should be added to the  
principal risks of the business. This is described 
on page 60.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
OPERATIONAL RISKS 

DESCRIPTION OF RISK

MITIGATION

CHANGE FROM PRIOR YEAR

STRATEGIC REPORT 

59

No change (focus on 
continuous improvement).

No change (focus on 
continuous improvement 
against a background of 
increasing customer 
expectations).

No change.

Health & safety

The nature of our operational and 
construction workplaces means 
that	there	is	a	significant	inherent 	
risk to the health and safety of our 
staff and supply chain of which we 
are acutely conscious.

Our workplaces are healthy and safe

Customer trust and confidence

Our customers are at the heart of 
everything we do and failure to 
deliver a consistently unrivalled 
customer experience or negative 
media coverage resulting in a poor 
public perception of our reputation 
could damage our customers’ trust 
and	confidence	in	our	business.

We provide excellent service and 
impress our customers

Our customers consider the services 
they receive to be value for money

We are a company that customers 
can trust

Water service failure

A problem in our water system 
could cause either a major loss of 
supply	or	for	unfit	water	to	be 	
supplied.

This could have many potential 
causes, including the failure of a 
strategic water main or treatment 
works, loss of power supply or 
contamination of a service 
reservoir.

We provide a reliable and sufficient 
supply of water 

We supply clean, clear drinking 
water that tastes good

The health and safety of our staff, 
contractors and members of the public 
is our highest priority. We are proud of 
our record of maintaining a healthy and 
safe workplace, but not complacent, 
and we are working hard to improve this 
further.

Health and safety matters are given a 
high priority at all meetings of our ELT 
and Board. Long-term planning and 
targets are set to drive continuous 
improvement. This is underpinned by 
our focus on improving behavioural 
safety and creating a great safety 
culture.

Our health and safety management 
system	defines	clear	arrangements	and	
responsibilities for implementation and 
management throughout the Company, 
and this is externally audited as part of 
our	OHSAS	18001	certification.

Our unrivalled customer experience 
strategy was co-created with our 
customers so that we could understand 
what was really important to them. We 
continue to involve customers through 
active participation and over 400,000 of 
our customers helped to shape our 
Business Plan for 2020-25.

We	have	invested	in	significant	
improvements in our customer facing 
systems and the digital experience we 
offer to our customers.

We continue to improve our support for 
customers in vulnerable circumstances, 
through our Inclusivity Strategy, 
StepChange partnership and new 
affordability tariffs. We plan to take this 
further through our commitment to 
eradicate water poverty across our 
supply areas.

We operate a risk-based prioritisation 
process for the maintenance and 
replacement of our assets. We are ISO 
55001	(Asset	Management)	certified	on	
a company-wide basis, demonstrating 
that we follow best practice in the 
long-term management of our assets. 
We monitor the effectiveness of our 
asset management through a number of 
asset health measures.

We have well developed business 
continuity plans in place for managing 
incidents,	down	to	a	site	specific	level. 	
These are regularly tested.

We restrict access to our treated water 
network through authorisation and 
physical security measures.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
DESCRIPTION OF RISK

MITIGATION

CHANGE FROM PRIOR YEAR

STRATEGIC REPORT  60

No change.

New principal risk

We operate a risk-based prioritisation 
process for the maintenance and 
replacement of our assets. We are ISO 
55001	(Asset	Management)	certified	on	
a company-wide basis, demonstrating 
that we follow best practice in the 
long-term management of our assets. 
We monitor the effectiveness of our 
asset management through a number of 
asset health measures.

We continue to invest heavily in 
preventing	pollution	and	sewer	flooding	
and have a pollution management 
programme with multiple workstreams 
to tackle the root causes.

We engage with our customers and 
local communities through initiatives 
such as ‘Love Your Drain’ and Water 
Rangers and working with partners to 
deliver SuDS.

We	are	also	investing	significantly	in 	
proactive maintenance and cleaning of 
the network, real time monitoring and 
analysis,	flooding	mitigation	and	
investment to increase network 
capacity.

Our response to the Covid-19 pandemic 
has demonstrated that we can continue 
to operate effectively even under strict 
lockdown conditions.

We have well developed business 
continuity plans in place which have 
been updated through Covid-19 
pandemic.

We have been able to quickly enable 
large parts of our customer and support 
service teams to work remotely from 
home, as well as maintaining 
operational activities, taking account of 
Covid-19 risk assessments and with 
appropriate adjustments.

Wastewater service failure

A problem in our wastewater 
system could cause either 
significant	environmental	pollution	
or	flooding	of	customer	properties.

This could have many potential 
causes,	including	insufficient	
network capacity to cope with 
severe weather events, 
misconnected properties and the 
consequences of sewer blockages 
or collapses.

We provide a sewerage service that 
deals effectively with sewage and 
heavy rainfall

Impact of pandemic 

Unavailability of staff due to a 
pandemic outbreak. This could 
result	in	a	significant	impact	on	a 	
number of business areas with 
people, service, operational and 
financial	consequences	including	
the Company’s ability to deliver 
services to customers.

Also, impact of an extended 
lockdown or social distancing 
measures impacting on our 
customers and ability to function 
normally.

Financial risks include reduced 
revenue from customers, increased 
operating costs, impacts on 
delivery of capital investment and 
potential impacts on PCs.

We provide excellent service and 
impress our customers

We provide a reliable and sufficient 
supply of water

We provide a sewerage service that 
deals effectively with sewage and 
heavy rainfall

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
DESCRIPTION OF RISK

MITIGATION

CHANGE FROM PRIOR YEAR

STRATEGIC REPORT 

61

Increasing risk over time, 
especially in relation to sewer 
flooding.

Our approach to mitigating short-term 
risks of service failures on our water 
and wastewater businesses are set out 
in the risks above.

We consider the longer-term impacts of 
climate change in our long-term 
planning, such as our Water Resource 
Management Plan, and identify long 
term solutions to future potential 
resilience issues well in advance.

Our Resilience Framework provides a 
structure for us to achieve resilience in 
the round by taking an integrated and 
systematic approach to understanding 
risk and resilience challenges across all 
of our business areas and how they 
interact.

Effect of climate change

In the short term, climate change 
may cause more volatile weather 
conditions which could impact on 
customer service through 
disrupting water supply or causing 
sewer	flooding.

Over the longer term, climate 
change could impact on water 
resources resilience and the 
integrity of our assets.

This may be exacerbated by 
growing population and ongoing 
urbanisation.

We provide a reliable and sufficient 
supply of water

We provide a sewerage service that 
deals effectively with sewage and 
heavy rainfall

We deliver water and sewerage 
services that meet the needs of 
current and future generations in a 
changing world

COMPLIANCE RISKS

DESCRIPTION OF RISK

MITIGATION

CHANGE FROM PRIOR YEAR

Cyber security

Key business systems could be 
lost as a result of a malicious 
attack or failure of cyber security.

Sensitive data could be released in 
breach of the Data Protection Act, 
General Data Protection Regulation 
(GDPR) or Environmental 
Information Regulations (EIR).

May not comply with obligations 
under the Networks & Information 
Systems Directive.

We are a company that customers 
can trust

No change.

Our Information Security policy sets out 
our commitment to the continuous 
improvement of information security 
controls and culture throughout the 
business. This is delivered through 
software and hardware access controls, 
additional levels of security for web-
facing systems and clear policies and 
procedures and user awareness, 
supported	by	briefings	and	training.

We have implemented a resilient 
infrastructure which includes full 
back-up and recovery, and also 
fail-over to other hardware in the event 
of a local failure.

Data is protected through access 
controls, laptop encryption and 
awareness	briefings.	A	ten	point	data 	
protection action plan has been 
developed to further mitigate the risks. 
This activity is supported by a 
dedicated team covering security, data 
protection and EIR.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
DESCRIPTION OF RISK

MITIGATION

CHANGE FROM PRIOR YEAR

STRATEGIC REPORT  62

Increased regulatory 
uncertainty through CMA 
referral.

Reduced political uncertainty 
after UK General Election.

Externally driven, but we have actively 
engaged with Ofwat throughout the 
current price review process by 
responding to formal consultations and 
regular direct dialogue.

The CMA referral will independently 
review our PR19 FD providing a further 
opportunity to set out and support our 
plans.

We continue to engage with all political 
stakeholders, both directly and through 
Water UK, to ensure that any debate is 
well-informed.

This risk is also mitigated by our 
excellent performance, behaviours and 
values.

Regulatory and political changes

Changes to the Licence or 
regulatory methodology could 
impact adversely on the balance of 
risk and return or reduce investor 
confidence	in	the	stability	and	
predictability of the regulatory 
framework.

Outcome of PR19 process remains 
uncertain as a result of referral to 
CMA.

A change in future government 
could	introduce	significant	changes	
in policy.

Our finances are sound, stable and 
achieve a fair balance between 
customers and investors

FINANCIAL RISKS 

DESCRIPTION OF RISK

MITIGATION

CHANGE FROM PRIOR YEAR

Risk remains heightened due 
to	uncertainty	in	financial	
markets as a result of the UK’s 
process to exit the EU and 
Covid-19 impacts.

No change. Actuarial valuation 
in progress.

The Board has approved treasury 
policies which set out how we manage 
treasury risks (see page 56).
Our	five	year	plans	identify	future 	
borrowing requirements and we plan 
our	financing	strategy	accordingly	over	
this time horizon. This is supported by 
£450m of standby committed borrowing 
facilities, which was fully undrawn at 31 
March 2020, and we maintain 
substantial	headroom	in	the	financial	
covenants for these facilities.

We are committed to maintaining our 
investment grade credit ratings and 
manage	our	financial	plans	accordingly.	
Our viability statement on pages 102 to 
103 reports	on	the	financial	resilience	of 	
our plan over a ten year time horizon.

We have an agreed schedule of 
contributions from our most recent 
actuarial	valuation	of	our	defined	
benefit	pension	scheme,	as	at	31 	
December 2016. Our employer 
covenant	remains	strong,	reflecting	the	
long-term nature of our business and 
25 year rolling term of our Licence.

Funding and liquidity risk

A key funding risk would be an 
inability to access future funding at 
acceptable rates due to market 
uncertainty. Future borrowing costs 
could increase as a result of a 
credit rating downgrade or the loss 
of EIB as a source of low cost 
funding, due to Brexit.

Liquidity risk could arise due to 
breaching	financial	covenants	on	
committed facilities.

Our finances are sound, stable and 
achieve a fair balance between 
customers and investors

Pensions

Risk	of	increased	pension	deficit	at 	
the next actuarial valuation of our 
defined	benefit	pension	scheme	(at	
31 December 2019) as a result of 
market conditions, increasing 
balance sheet liabilities and some 
measures of gearing.

Risk of increased employer 
contributions, for either ongoing 
service obligations or to repair the 
pension	deficit.

Our finances are sound, stable and 
achieve a fair balance between 
customers and investors 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
DESCRIPTION OF RISK

MITIGATION

CHANGE FROM PRIOR YEAR

STRATEGIC REPORT  63

Increased, due to outcome of 
PR19 FD and continued 
uncertainty through the CMA 
referral process.

Financial performance

A	failure	to	deliver	our	financial 	
plans could impact on expected 
shareholder returns.

This	could	result	from	significant	
adverse movements on costs, 
interest or tax or a failure to deliver 
efficiency	commitments.

A sustained period of low CPI(H) 
inflation	could	depress	RCV,	
increasing gearing.

The Board asked Ofwat to refer the 
PR19 FD to the CMA as it 
concluded that it would adversely 
impact	the	long	term	financial	
resilience of the business.

Our finances are sound, stable and 
achieve a fair balance between 
customers and investors

We are implementing a range of 
efficiency	actions	for	both	operating	
and capital expenditure and progress is 
reported monthly to ELT. We maintain 
more than 50% of our borrowings on 
fixed	rates,	providing	certainty.

We resubmitted our PR19 Business 
Plan in the light of Ofwat’s Initial 
Assessment, including additional 
evidence supporting our expenditure 
plans.

The CMA referral will independently 
review our PR19 FD providing a further 
opportunity to set out and support our 
plans.
Our viability statement on pages 102 to 
103	reports	on	the	financial	resilience	of 	
our plan over a ten year time horizon.

BREXIT RISK

The R&CSC has considered risks to the business 
which could result from the UK leaving the 
European Union (EU) without a trade agreement, 
but does not consider this to be a principal risk, 
other than in relation to future EIB funding as 
explained above. We have engaged with 
government, our supply chain and other 
stakeholders to review potential impacts of 
restrictions being placed on trading with the EU. 
Whilst NWL operates entirely within the UK, we 
are conscious that some of our supply chain does 
rely on transportation from Europe. We have 
made appropriate preparations to mitigate 
against these risks and ensure continuity of 
service.

By order of the Board

H Mottram, CEO 
15 July 2020

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT  64

GOVERNANCE 
REPORT

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT  65

CHAIRMAN’S INTRODUCTION

The Board of NWL recognises that the Company has 
a very important role in the lives and wellbeing of its 
customers and that it is a privilege to be entrusted 
to provide essential public services to millions of 
customers. 

We also have key 
environmental 
responsibilities and we 
are a significant employer 
and buyer of goods and 
services. The NWL Board 
understands and accepts 
its responsibilities and 
listened carefully to the 
views of our many 
stakeholders throughout 

A J Hunter

the preparation of our Plan.  As I explain in my 
statement at page 4, the Company asked Ofwat to 
refer its FD of the 2019 Price Review to the CMA 
for a redetermination and the outcome of this 
process will be known in due course. The Board 
remains fully committed to ensuring that NWL 
continues to provide excellent customer service, 
and is ethical and fair in its relationship with all 
stakeholders.

Corporate governance requirements continue to 
evolve and, last year, Ofwat prescribed four new 
objectives (the 2019 Objectives) which it expects 
us to meet. These are set out on pages 74 to 80 
below, where we have also explained how we 
meet them. The 2019 Objectives have now been 
incorporated into each company’s Licence. Along 
with most others in the sector, NWL consented to 
the change, noting Ofwat’s acknowledgement 
that companies will have scope to demonstrate 
compliance in different ways. That flexibility is 
consistent with the view of the Financial 
Reporting Council (FRC) that there is no ‘one-
size-fits-all’ version of corporate governance.

The 2019 Objectives are now the primary 
governance framework against which NWL will 
report, but the Board has agreed that it would also 
be appropriate to report compliance with the 
Wates Corporate Governance Principles for Large 
Private Companies (the Wates Principles). NWL 
has, in prior years, reported compliance with the 
UK Corporate Governance Code.  Whilst we will 
now focus on the 2019 Objectives and the Wates 
Principles, our standards of corporate governance 

will be at least as high as in previous years and 
higher wherever appropriate.

As a private company with NWL’s ownership 
structure, we believe it is consistent with good 
corporate governance for there to be significant 
shareholder representation on the Board, 
including the Chairmanship. However, we accept 
that there needs to be an appropriate balance.  
Currently, there are four INEDs and four further 
NEDs (including me as Chairman). This year we 
intend to appoint an additional INED which will 
make INEDs the largest single group on the 
Board.

The INEDs play a very significant role in the 
functioning of the Company and are instrumental 
in all aspects of the Board’s work, taking a leading 
role on the various Committees, which the Board 
relies on. The Committees are effectively led by 
the INEDs (within agreed parameters) and handle 
a very significant volume of important work and 
present options and proposals to the Board. 

Our four current INEDs are highly experienced, 
capable and independently-minded professionals 
with a diverse range of experience and talents. 
Working with the other NEDs, they scrutinise the 
performance of management in meeting agreed 
goals and objectives and monitor the reporting of 
performance. We believe our current governance 
arrangements, with strong INED leadership, 
ensure that there is always sufficient 
independent membership and judgement on the 
Board, further supporting the Board and its 
Committees in making high quality decisions 
that address diverse customer and stakeholder 
needs.  This independent voice will be further 
expanded when we appoint a fifth INED later this 
year.  Moreover, in accordance with common 
governance practice, all four current INEDs will 
step down by the end of 2021 and be succeeded by 
new appointees, which will allow new talent and 
experience to be brought to the Board.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT  66

I am pleased to report that our recent Board 
evaluation exercise delivered very positive 
feedback on how the Board operates. We again 
engaged Professor Giovanna Michelon (a 
specialist in corporate governance and social 
responsibility) to facilitate the exercise and her 
report concludes that the Board and its 
Committees are working effectively, as evidenced 
by healthy and challenging discussions, an 
appropriate and balanced mix of expertise and 
competencies and the high quality work carried 
out by the Committees. These findings are 
entirely consistent with my own view of how well 
the Board works, on behalf of all the Company’s 
stakeholders.

A J Hunter 
Chairman

As I explained in last year’s report, the Board 
functions as an integrated whole. All Directors 
have the same legal responsibilities and each 
Director understands his or her individual 
responsibility to act in the best interests of the 
Company, as well as the importance of the 
service provided to our customers and our 
environmental responsibilities. All Directors play 
a full part in Board meetings and shape the 
Company’s strategy, as well as ensuring that 
customers’ interests are fully considered in any 
investment and operational decisions. The 
composition of the Board ensures a sound 
balance of experience, knowledge and 
independence and that decision making is not 
dominated by any single group.

Paul Rew, our Senior INED, sets out in his report 
(on pages 67 to 68) how the INEDs are fully 
involved in all the main aspects of NWL’s 
governance and, throughout the year, were 
invited to, and participated in, all the Board 
meetings of our holding company, NWGL (except 
in relation to NHH retail business). 

In practice, the Company complies with the 2019 
Ofwat Objectives and, with very few exceptions, 
the supporting Provisions. The effective 
arrangements which the Board and its 
Committees have in place to ensure such 
compliance are explained in some detail below in 
the Corporate Governance Report (on pages 64 to 
104).

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT  67

SENIOR INDEPENDENT  
NON-EXECUTIVE 
DIRECTOR’S REPORT

As Senior Independent Non-Executive Director 
(SINED) I am pleased to be able to describe the role of 
NWL’s INEDs, and the key role played by the INEDs in 
the Board Committees and Sub-committee.

I am happy to endorse the 
Chairman’s explanation of 
the key role which the 
INEDs continue to play in 
NWL’s governance, 
assurance and decision 
making. I chair the Audit 
Committee (AC), the 
R&CSC and the CMA 
Board Sub-group and I 
chaired the PR19 Board 
Sub-group, which I explain below. Fellow INEDs 
sit on all these bodies, as well as on the 
Remuneration and Nomination Committees. 
INEDs are in the majority on the AC, the R&CSC, 
the Remuneration Committee and the 
Nomination Committee.

Paul Rew

We are therefore fully involved in all the main 
aspects of NWL’s governance and the Board is 
satisfied that this enables it to ensure that sound 
governance is maintained. 

In my recent reports I have explained the role of 
the PR19 Board Sub-group, which provided 
integrated support to the Board as a whole in 
driving forward and assuring preparation of our 
Plan. The PR19 Board Sub-group was fully 
involved in all aspects of the development of our 
Plan and all members reviewed and challenged 
both the overall strategy and the detailed 
submissions, as well as the re-submissions 
following Ofwat’s Initial Assessment of Business 
Plans. On the ground, INEDs were involved in 
customer focus groups, meetings of the Water 
Forum and other stakeholder groups. 

As the Chairman explains in his statement (at 
page 4), the Board did not consider that Ofwat’s 
FD for 2020–25 adequately reflected the clear 
guidance provided by our customers and other 
stakeholders.  This manifested in the 
disallowance by Ofwat of schemes to enhance 
water supply resilience and reduce sewer 

flooding.  Moreover, the overall package did not, 
in the Board’s opinion, put the Company on a 
sustainable footing to meet the very stretching 
targets set by Ofwat in an increasingly 
challenging operating environment.

The Board therefore agreed, unanimously, to ask 
Ofwat to refer the FD to the CMA for 
redetermination, which is in progress. In order to 
support the Board in managing the CMA referral, 
the Board established the CMA Board Sub-group, 
which includes all the INEDs, the Executive 
Directors and professional advisers.  This Sub-
group developed the Company’s Statement of 
Case for approval by the Board and submission to 
the CMA and the outcome is awaited.

Although the INEDs are not members of the 
NWGL Board, we have been present at its Board 
meetings this year, which has continued to 
encourage a cohesive approach at both Boards 
and given us full transparency. We have not, 
however, received papers relating to the NHH 
retail market or been present when that has been 
under discussion.

The INEDs have again all taken part in extensive 
sessions with management on business risk and 
customer service, have met from time to time 
without management or the other Directors being 
present (with and without the Company’s 
auditors) and attended seminars arranged by 
Ofwat and other events relating to the water 
sector. Beyond the formal work of the Board and 
its various committees, we have also continued 
to develop a broader insight into the work of the 
Company through other channels such as NWL’s 
Innovation Festival, customer focus groups, 
meetings on environmental issues, the Water 
Forum, chairing internal sprints, and through 
discussions with Directors and staff at informal 
events.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT  68

In conclusion, I and the other INEDs believe that 
the Board and Committees have sufficient 
independent membership, and this will be 
enhanced by the appointment of a fifth INED this 
year. Our INEDs, through their leading role in the 
Committees, continue to exert significant 
influence in setting the direction which the Board 
takes in all key areas of strategy and business 
planning, monitoring, governance and reporting.

P Rew 
Senior Independent Non-Executive Director

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

GOVERNANCE REPORT  69

H Mottram (CEO) joined 
the Board in 2010, when 
she was appointed as CEO 
of NWL and NWGL. Ms 
Mottram is a Non-
Executive Director of 
Centrica plc, Vice-Chair of 
the North East Local 
Enterprise Partnership, a 
member of the CBI Board 
and Vice-Chair of 

H Mottram

Newcastle University Council. Ms Mottram was 
named North East Business Executive of the Year 
in 2017 recognising her significant contribution to 
business in the north east of England. She was 
awarded an OBE in 2010 for services to the rail 
industry and a CBE in 2018 for services to the 
water industry and business community. 

Key strengths: Leadership, corporate overview, 
infrastructure and customer service.

C I Johns (Finance 
Director) joined the Board 
in 2013, having served 
as Finance Director of 
NGN, which is also part of 
the Cheung Kong Group, 
since 2005. Before joining 
NGN, Mr Johns, who is a 
Chartered Accountant, 
held senior financial 
management positions 

C I Johns

in the financial services sector, in both Yorkshire 
and London. Mr Johns’ previous positions include 
being Head of Finance and Accounting within the 
UK lending operations of Provident Financial plc, 
and a senior management role in the Financial 
Reporting and Control Group of Morgan Stanley. 
Mr Johns stepped down from the Board on 30 
May 2020.

Key strengths: Finance and infrastructure.

BOARD MEMBERSHIP

A J Hunter (Non-
Executive Chairman) 
joined the Board in 
October 2011.  Mr Hunter 
is Deputy Managing 
Director of CKI, which is 
listed on The Hong Kong 
Stock Exchange and is a 
substantial shareholder 
in the Group. Mr Hunter is 
an Executive Director of 

A J Hunter

Power Assets Holdings Limited, a listed company. 
He has been an Executive Director of CKI since 
December 2006 and Deputy Managing Director 
since May 2010. Mr Hunter acted as the Chief 
Operating Officer of CKI from December 2006 to 
May 2010. Prior to his appointment to the board 
of Power Assets Holdings Limited in 1999, Mr 
Hunter was Finance Director of the Hutchison 
Property Group. He holds a Master of Arts degree, 
a Master’s degree in Business Administration 
and is a member of the Institute of Chartered 
Accountants of Scotland and of the Hong Kong 
Institute of Certified Public Accountants. Mr 
Hunter chairs the Remuneration Committee and 
Nomination Committee.

Key strengths: Leadership, strategic overview, 
finance and infrastructure.

P Rew (Senior 
Independent Non-
Executive Director) joined 
the Board in 2010.  Mr Rew 
is a Chartered Accountant 
and was a partner in 
PricewaterhouseCoopers 
LLP (PwC) from 1987 
until 2010, where he was 
lead partner for a diverse 
range of FTSE 100 clients 
and for PwC’s UK energy, 

P Rew

utilities and mining sector practice. Mr Rew is 
a Non-Executive Director of the Care Quality 
Commission and chairs its Audit Committee. He 
was formerly a Non-Executive Director of the Met 
Office and of Defra. Mr Rew chairs the AC, R&CSC 
and the CMA Board Sub-group, and chaired the 
PR19 Board Sub-group. He is also a member of 
the Remuneration Committee and Nomination 
Committee.

Key strengths: Finance, risk and  
corporate governance.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
A C Jones (Assets and 
Assurance Director) joined 
the NWL Board in 2004. An 
economist by background, 
Mr Jones holds an MBA 
with distinction from 
Warwick and has extensive 
experience in dealing with 
government and regulatory 
bodies. Mr Jones is a 
Chartered Environmentalist 

A C Jones

and worked as a government economist and 
economic consultant before joining the water 
industry. He has held non-executive positions at 
a number of water industry organisations and  
is currently Chair of PNE Group, a social 
enterprise company.

Key strengths: Economic regulation and 
corporate planning.

M Fay

M Fay (Independent Non-
Executive Director) joined 
the Board in 2010.  Ms Fay 
was Managing Director of 
Tyne Tees Television until 
December 2003 when she 
became Chair of One North 
East, a position she held 
until August 2010, and was 
Deputy Chair of The Sage 
Gateshead until March 2018. 
Ms Fay is Deputy Chair 
of Governors of the University of Sunderland, 
Chair of South Tyneside Council’s Economic 
Regeneration Board, Chair of the Customs House 
South Shields and a Non-Executive Director 
of the Tyne and Wear Passenger Transport 
Executive (which trades as ‘Nexus’). She was 
awarded a CBE in 2010 for services to regional 
development and is a Deputy Lieutenant for 
Tyne and Wear. Ms Fay is a member of the CMA 
Board Sub-group, Remuneration Committee and 
Nomination Committee.

Key strengths: Corporate overview and 
customer service.

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

70

Dr S Lyster

Dr S Lyster (Independent 
Non-Executive Director) 
joined the Board in 2006. 
A lawyer by training, Dr 
Lyster qualified in both the 
UK and the USA and is the 
author of the leading legal 
textbook on international 
wildlife law.  Dr Lyster was 
Chief Executive of LEAD 
International from 2005 
to 2011. Before joining LEAD, he was Director 
General of The Wildlife Trusts and previously 
worked for World Wildlife Fund for nine years, 
where he was responsible for its global policy 
work on international conventions. He is 
Chairman of Conservation International-UK, 
a Trustee of Kilverstone Wildlife Conservation 
Trust and the Rural Community Council of Essex, 
and a Council member of World Land Trust. In 
July 2014, Dr Lyster was appointed to the Board 
of Natural England and, in 2020, was appointed 
a member of Essex County Council’s Climate 
Action Commission. He is a Deputy Lieutenant 
for the County of Essex. Dr Lyster is a member 
of the CMA Board Sub-group, AC, Remuneration 
Committee, Nomination Committee and R&CSC.

Key strengths: Conservation, the environment 
and law.

M A B Nègre (Independent 
Non-Executive Director) 
joined the Board in 2006. 
Mr Nègre was, between 
April 2000 and April 2001, 
the CEO of the former 
Northumbrian Water Group 
plc and the chief corporate 
representative of its parent 
company, Suez, in the UK. 
Mr Nègre was a founding 
Director of NWGL when it 

M A B Nègre

acquired the Group from Suez SA in 2003 and 
listed it on the London Stock Exchange (LSE). He 
currently chairs Ecofin Vista Hedge Fund and 
Ecofin Global Renewable and Infrastructure Fund 
and is a Non-Executive Director of LSE-listed 
Investment Trust EGL plc. Mr Nègre is a member 
of the CMA Board Sub-group, AC and R&CSC.

Key strengths: Strategy, utilities  
and infrastructure.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT 

71

D N Macrae (Non-
Executive Director) joined 
the Board in October 
2011, and represents CK 
Infrastructure Holdings 
Limited, where he holds 
the position of Head of 
International Business. 
Mr Macrae has over 25 
years’ experience in the 
infrastructure investment 
field and holds a Bachelor’s and a Master’s degree 
in Philosophy, Politics & Economics. He is a 
member of the Remuneration Committee and 
Nomination Committee.

D N Macrae

Key strengths: Finance, infrastructure and 
corporate overview.

L S Chan (Non-Executive 
Director) joined the Board 
in 2016, having been 
appointed by CKH, and 
has been an Executive 
Director of CKI since 
January 2011 and Chief 
Financial Officer of CKI 
since January 2006. Mr 
Chan joined Hutchison 
Whampoa Limited, 
which is a substantial 

L S Chan

shareholder of CKI, in January 1992 and has been 
with the Cheung Kong Group since May 1994. 
Mr Chan is a fellow of the Hong Kong Institute 
of Certified Public Accountants, a fellow of the 
Association of Chartered Certified Accountants 
and also a member of the Institute of Certified 
Management Accountants (Australia). He is a 
member of the Audit Committee.

Key strengths: Finance, infrastructure and 
corporate overview.

F R Frame (Non-Executive 
Director) joined the Board 
in November 2011, having 
been appointed by Li Ka 
Shing Foundation Limited, 
a company limited by 
guarantee and a charity, 
which is a substantial 
shareholder in the Group. 
A lawyer by profession, Mr 
Frame served as Deputy 

F R Frame

Chairman of The Hongkong and Shanghai 
Banking Corporation; as Chairman of South China 
Morning Post Limited and The Wallem Group 
Limited; and as a Director of The Weir Group plc, 
Swire Pacific Limited, The British Bank of the 
Middle East, Edinburgh Dragon Trust plc and 
Baxter International Inc. He holds the degrees of 
Master of Arts and Bachelor of Laws.  Mr Frame 
retired from the Board on 31 December 2019.

Key strengths: Corporate overview and law.

H L Kam (Non-Executive 
Director) joined the 
Board in October 2011, 
having been appointed by 
Cheung Kong (Holdings) 
Limited (CKH), a wholly-
owned subsidiary of 
CK Hutchison Holdings 
Limited of which he is 
the Deputy Managing 
Director. Mr Kam is also 

H L Kam

Group Managing Director of CKI, a position he 
has held since its incorporation in May 1996. 
He is the Deputy Managing Director of CK Asset 
Holdings Ltd., President and Chief Executive 
Officer of CK Life Sciences Int’l. (Holdings) Inc., as 
well as Chairman of Hui Xian Asset Management 
Limited, which manages Hui Xian Real Estate 
Investment Trust, a listed real estate investment 
trust. Mr Kam holds a Bachelor of Science degree 
in Engineering and a Master’s degree in Business 
Administration.

Key strengths: Leadership, strategic overview, 
finance and infrastructure.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT 

72

Attendance at the five additional Board meetings 
held during the year was as follows:

ATTENDANCE

5

5

5

5

5

5

4

5

3

1

5

4

ATTENDANCE AT BOARD MEETINGS

There were five scheduled meetings during the 
year and five shorter additional meetings. The 
Board considered this sufficient to enable it to 
discharge its duties effectively, and will meet out 
of the agreed cycle for time-critical matters or 
significant matters that arise as necessary.

Attendance at the five scheduled meetings during 
the year was as follows:

NAME

A J Hunter

P Rew

H Mottram

C I Johns

NAME

A J Hunter

P Rew

H Mottram

C I Johns

A C Jones

M Fay

Dr S Lyster

M A B Nègre

F R Frame

H L Kam

D N Macrae

L S Chan

ATTENDANCE

A C Jones

M Fay

Dr S Lyster

M A B Nègre

F R Frame

H L Kam

D N Macrae

L S Chan

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

4

4

4

5

5

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE 
STATEMENT

The Boards of the Company and its holding 
company, NWGL, are committed to high 
standards of corporate governance. Ofwat has 
now embedded the 2019 Ofwat Objectives in the 
Company’s Licence, to ensure that governance is 
sound and that the Company’s Directors, acting 
as such, act independently of parent companies.

The arrangements and functioning of the Board, 
its Committees, Sub-committee and Sub-groups 
adhere to the Wates Principles and the 2019 
Ofwat Objectives, with the latter being subject 
to the minor exceptions explained below. As 
set out above, there are currently four INEDs, a 
further four NEDs (including the Chairman) and 
two Executive Directors.  These arrangements, 
with strong INED input which is expanded 
upon in the section below on meeting the 2019 
Ofwat Objectives, ensure that there is sufficient 
independent challenge and judgement on the 
Board. Moreover, the Company will appoint an 
additional INED during 2020, making INEDs the 
largest single group on the Board.

The Chairman comments in his introduction 
to the Governance Report (on pages 65 to 66) 
on the balance of the Board, which functions 
as an integrated whole, and the quality and 
contribution of the INEDs: P Rew, S Lyster,  
M Fay and M A B Nègre. Their biographical 
details are set out on pages 69 to 71 above. They 
were appointed on the recommendation of the 
Nomination Committee of Northumbrian Water 
Group plc, when it was independently listed. 
The Board has rigorously reviewed the re-
appointment of the INEDs and determined that 

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

73

they are independent, notwithstanding that they 
have served on the Board for more than nine 
years. However, all four existing INEDs will step 
down over the course of 2020 and 2021 and be 
succeeded by new appointees, which will  
allow new talent and experience to be brought to 
the Board.

The Chairman ensures that the Board works 
in a collegiate way, in the best interests of the 
Company and its stakeholders, and that each 
Director has an equal voice. All members of the 
Board are content that the balance of the Board is 
appropriate, but welcome the decision to appoint 
an additional INED during 2020. The Directors 
have all been able to allocate sufficient time to 
the Company to discharge their responsibilities 
effectively.

As the Chairman says in his introduction 
(on pages 65 to 66), the INEDs, within agreed 
parameters, effectively lead the work of the 
Committees, which hold very full meetings with 
considerable workloads, to prepare the ground for 
the Board.  

There is a clear division of responsibilities 
between the Chairman and CEO. This has been 
set out in writing and agreed by the Board.

The Company has put in place Directors’ and 
Officers’ insurance cover for the benefit of all 
Directors of the Company. In addition, NWGL 
entered into a Deed of Indemnity on 21 March 
2017 to provide Directors of NWGL and its 
subsidiaries further protection against  
potential liability.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
BOARD LEADERSHIP, 
TRANSPARENCY AND GOVERNANCE – 
THE 2019 OFWAT OBJECTIVES (AND 
SUPPORTING PROVISIONS) 

We explain below how we meet the Objectives 
and supporting Provisions on board leadership, 
transparency and governance as published by 
Ofwat in January 2019.

Objective 1

The Board of the Appointee establishes the 
company’s purpose, strategy and values, and is 
satisfied that these and its culture reflect the 
needs of all those it serves.
Our comments below on compliance with the 
relevant supporting Provisions explain how the 
Company meets this Objective:

(i) The Board develops and promotes the 
Company’s purpose in consultation with a wide 
range of stakeholders and reflecting its role as 
a provider of an essential public service.

The Board’s purpose statement (set out on page 
13) has been informed by the very extensive 
consultation exercise conducted in preparation 
for the submission of the Company’s PR19 
Business Plan, as well as continuous broadly 
based consultation in the normal course of 
business and Ofwat’s emphasis on the need for 
companies to embed a “public value” ethos. 
The consultation underpinning the PR19 
Business Plan was comprehensive, with 
responses from more than 400,000 customers 
as well as from our Water Forum, or regulators, 
employees, suppliers and partners.

There is, of course, a comprehensive and 
continuous programme of engagement with 
customers and full details are set out in the 
Company’s APR.

This open and consultative culture is a key 
element of how the Company does business. It 
is also maintained through a very broad 
programme of engagement, including regular 
engagement at Chief Executive level with local 
authorities across our operating areas, and 
participation in regional and national business 
organisations. The Company also hosts 
numerous site visits by MPs, civil servants, and 
senior regulators to encourage open and 
transparent debate about the challenges faced 
by the sector and to enable the Company to 
understand their respective concerns and 
priorities.

As explained on page 14, the Company intends 
to review its purpose statement over the 
coming year, drawing on extensive further 
work with senior executives, board members, 
employees, customers and other stakeholders.

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

74

(ii) The Board makes sure that the Company’s
strategy, values and culture are consistent with
its purpose.

The Board has reviewed and discussed the 
Company’s strategy, values and culture and is 
satisfied that these are consistent with the 
purpose. The Board recognises that the 
Company’s strategy needs to reflect the 
Company’s purpose, as well as customers’ long 
term priorities and to take account of Ofwat’s 
emphasis on public value. NWL’s purpose 
statement is therefore underpinned by key 
principles which demonstrate that NWL:

(a)  provides a reliable, resilient, safe and high

quality water and wastewater service for all;

(b)  intends to leave the environment in a better

condition for the next generation;

(c)  is committed to keeping water affordable
including for those on low incomes; and

(d)  acts in the long-term interests of society

and the environment while still providing
the very best service for customers today.

(iii) The Board monitors and assesses values
and culture to satisfy itself that behaviour
throughout the business is aligned with the
Company’s purpose.  Where it finds
misalignment it takes corrective action.

(a)  The Board has received and discussed

detailed feedback on an extensive employee
engagement survey conducted by “Best
Companies”.  This provided a comprehensive
insight into the alignment of behaviour
throughout the business with the purpose.
The survey findings were positive but there
are always areas where there is scope to
improve engagement.  Line managers are
being supported to develop action plans to
further improve engagement and ensure
alignment of behaviour with the purpose.
Engagement will be re-assessed later in the
year to measure the improvement achieved
and identify any further steps required.

(b)  The Board has designated one of the INEDs,
M Fay, to engage with the workforce and to
provide the Board with a first-hand
assessment of the culture of the business.
Mrs Fay has fed back to the Board on her
experience of employee roadshows and
other site visits and a programme of virtual
(and, if safe, physical) visits will be arranged
during 2020.

(c) P Rew, S Lyster and M A B Nègre (INEDs)

have attended employee roadshows and the
Innovation Festival and fed back their views
to the Board.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT(d)  The Human Resources team is reviewing

Company policies and procedures to ensure
that these properly reflect the Company
purpose and to embed it where this is
appropriate.

(iv) Annual reporting explains the Board’s
activities and any corrective action taken.  It
also includes an annual statement from the
Board focusing on how the Company has set
its aspirations and performed for all those it
serves.

The Board receives detailed reports from the 
Executive Directors in advance of Board 
meetings, covering each aspect of the 
Company’s activities.

The Chairman leads the Board and ensures 
that all items on the Board agendas are 
discussed openly and that all Directors have an 
opportunity to express their views. He 
encourages constructive challenge, so that 
ideas and proposals are tested and explored 
fully. The Board recognises that customers’ 
interests are best served when the Company is 
flexible and innovative, so the ELT is always 
encouraged to think laterally and consider a 
range of solutions for each issue.

The Board makes key strategic decisions, 
approves the annual budget and notes the 
medium-term business plans. It also approves 
key regulatory submissions and very 
significant investments or expenditure which 
is not in the normal course of business. 
Investments which form part of projects within 
approved business plans are authorised by the 
Committees below Board level. Although this 
formal framework is very effective, the ELT 
takes great care to ensure that matters which 
relate to the quality of the Company’s services 
to customers, leakage, water quality and 
environmental performance are discussed 
fully by the Board.

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

75

The Standing or Executive Committees can 
take decisions not delegated to specific 
committees between Board meetings. All 
Directors receive notice of Standing Committee 
meetings and may participate if they wish. 
Decisions taken by the Standing or Executive 
Committees are reported at the next Board 
meeting. The Company’s Board meets at least 
five times each year.

During the year, the Board received regular 
detailed updates from the Executive Directors 
on each aspect of the Company’s work. There 
are also regular reports on each Board agenda 
on customer service, operational performance, 
health and safety, management of key business 
risks, the investment programme and 
regulatory matters. There is a strong focus on 
the Company’s success in delivering its key 
outcomes, as explained in the Strategic Report. 
The Chairman of the AC, R&CSC and Sub-
groups reports fully to the Board on their work. 
In addition, the following significant matters 
were considered by the Board, as a matter of 
sound governance:

(a)  the Annual Report and Financial

Statements;

(b) the annual business plan;

(c) data security;

(d) decisions on tariffs;

(e)  approval of several significant capital

projects;

(f)  review of performance commitment targets

and related investment priorities; and

(g)  matters relating to PR19, including

addressing Ofwat’s Initial Assessment of
Plans, the Draft Determination and FD and
the decision to ask Ofwat to refer the FD to
the CMA for redetermination.

 A Board statement as detailed above is 
included in NWL’s APR for the year ended 
31 March 2020.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTObjective 2

The Appointee has an effective Board with full 
responsibility for all aspects of the Appointee’s 
business for the long term.
NWL clearly meets this Objective. The Board sets, 
implements and supports the Company’s vision, 
values, standards and strategy and ensures 
compliance with policies and legal and regulatory 
obligations. We comment below on compliance 
with the relevant objectives:

  (i)  The regulated company sets out any 

matters that are reserved to shareholders or 
parent companies (where applicable) and 
explains how these are consistent with the 
board of the regulated company having full 
responsibility for all aspects of the regulated 
company’s business, including the freedom 
to set, and accountability for, all aspects of 
the regulated company’s strategy.

 Although proper regard is given to the 
interests of shareholders, in accordance with 
company law, NWL’s Board has full 
responsibility for all aspects of the 
Company’s business, including the freedom 
to set, and accountability for, all aspects of 
NWL’s strategy.  This is evidenced by the fact 
that the PR19 Business Plan and actions 
taken in response to the Draft and Final 
Determinations were developed and 
approved entirely by the NWL Board.

 The Company has adopted terms of 
reference which set out the matters reserved 
to the Board for approval and matters which 
are, or can be, delegated to the Committees, 
Sub-committee, Sub-groups and 
management. These are published on the 
Company’s website. 

 The Company has also adopted financial 
approval rules which set out the 
authorisation processes and financial limits 
to be applied to financial transactions within 
the Company. The terms of reference and 
financial approval rules are reviewed 
periodically by the Board.

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

76

 Although certain limited matters (such as 
extensions of directors’ appointments, large 
contract awards and significant borrowing 
arrangements) are referred to the NWGL 
Board, this is regarded as a formality. The 
NWGL Board accepts that the NWL Board is 
required to have full responsibility for all 
aspects of the regulated company’s business 
and, to that end, has never rejected a 
recommendation of the NWL Board.

  (ii)  Board committees, including but not limited 
to audit, remuneration and nomination 
committees, report into the board of the 
regulated company, with final decisions 
made at the level of the regulated company.

 All the NWL Board Committees report into 
the NWL Board and final decisions are made 
at that level.

(iii)  The board of the regulated company is fully 
focused on the activities of the regulated 
company; takes action to identify and 
manage conflicts of interest, including 
those resulting from significant 
shareholdings; and ensures that the 
influence of third parties does not 
compromise or override independent 
judgement.

 The Board is absolutely focused on the 
sustainable, long-term success of NWL.  
Any conflicts of interest are declared and 
Directors do not speak or vote on matters 
where a potential conflict arises.

 It is a key principle of the Cheung Kong 
group of companies that the boards of 
companies within the group manage their 
own affairs.  Whilst support and assistance 
is provided when asked for, it is recognised 
that local management have hands-on 
knowledge of the operational business and 
of customers’ needs and priorities.  The 
non-NWL interests of the shareholders are, 
therefore, never a factor in decision-making 
at the NWL Board and this approach is 
regularly re-affirmed by the NEDs in the 
clearest possible terms.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Objective 3

The Board of the Appointee’s leadership and 
approach to transparency and governance 
engenders trust in the Appointee and ensures 
accountability for their actions.
Our comments below on the relevant supporting 
provisions explain how the Company meets this 
Objective.  The provisions require publication of 
the following in a clear and accessible manner:

(i) An explanation of group structure.

        This is provided at page 54.

(ii)  An explanation of dividend policies and 

dividends paid, and how these take account 
of delivery for customers and other 
obligations (including to employees).

        The dividend policy, and how the policy 
        has been applied in the year, is explained 
        in note 8 to the Financial Statements.

(iii)  An explanation of the principal risks to the 

future success of the business, and how 
these risks have been considered and 
addressed. 

The Board has ultimate responsibility for 
risk management and determines 
appropriate risk appetite. The Board’s view 
of acceptable risk is based on a balanced 
assessment of all of the risks in the 
operating environment and aims to ensure 
an appropriate balance between risk 
aversion and opportunities. The Board 
monitors the management of risks and 
approves major decisions affecting the 
Company’s risk profile. The Board is 
supported in this by the R&CSC, from which 
it receives regular and detailed reports. 

The Board requires management to identify 
and assess the impact of risks to the 
business using a corporate risk model. In 
addition, during the year, a Sub-group of the 
Board carried out a review of strategic 
risks, which are potentially high-impact 

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

77

risks which are foreseeable but with a high 
degree of uncertainty. 

An explanation of principal risks, and our 
approach to mitigating these risks, is 
provided on pages 57 to 63.

(iv)  Details of board and committee 

membership, number of times met, 
attendance at each meeting and where 
relevant, the outcome of votes cast. 

Details of Board and Committee 
membership and meetings and attendance 
is set out at page 72.  No votes were held at 
any relevant meeting and all decisions 
were reached by consensus.

(v)    An explanation of the company’s executive 
pay policy and how the criteria for awarding 
short and long-term performance related 
elements are substantially linked to 
stretching delivery for customers and are 
rigorously applied.  Where directors’ 
responsibilities are substantially focused on 
the regulated company and they receive 
remuneration for these responsibilities from 
elsewhere in the group, policies relating to 
this pay are fully disclosed at the regulated 
company level. 

A detailed explanation of the Company’s 
executive pay policy is provided in the 
Remuneration Committee Report on pages 
88 to 99, including how the criteria for the 
short-term incentive plan have significant 
linkage to benefits for our customers and 
the wider environment. The Remuneration 
Committee Report also explains changes 
which took effect from 2020 to further 
increase the proportion of performance-
related executive pay aligned to delivering 
benefits for our customers, in both the 
short-term and long-term incentive plans.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE REPORT 

78

Objective 4

The Board of the Appointee and its committees 
are competent, well run, and have sufficient 
independent membership, ensuring they can 
make high quality decisions that address diverse 
customer and stakeholder needs.
Our comments below on the relevant supporting 
provisions explain how the Company meets  
this Objective.

(i)  Boards and committees have the 

appropriate balance of skills, experience, 
independence and knowledge of the 
company.  Boards identify what customer 
and stakeholder expertise is needed in the 
boardroom and how this need is addressed. 

The Board has determined that the following 
Directors are independent, notwithstanding 
that they have served on the Board for more 
than nine years:

•  M A B Nègre (appointed in 2006). Mr Nègre has 

no prior connections with the Group’s 
shareholders. He is a very experienced 
director and brings to the Board an excellent 
understanding of the business coupled with 
sound commercial judgement. The Board is 
satisfied that he continues to demonstrate a 
fully independent approach and to contribute 
a constructive and challenging perspective to 
Board discussions.

•  Dr S Lyster (appointed in 2006). Dr Lyster has 
no prior connections with the Group or its 
shareholders. He is a very experienced 
director, with particular expertise in wildlife, 
conservation and environmental matters, 
which are central to the Company’s work. He 
lives in the Company’s Essex and Suffolk 
supply area. The Board is satisfied that Dr 
Lyster continues to demonstrate a fully 
independent approach and to offer valuable 
constructive challenge.

•  M Fay (appointed in 2010).  Mrs Fay has no 

prior connection with the Group or its 
subsidiaries.  She is a very experienced 
director, with very strong connections to 
customers in the Company’s north-eastern 
service area, where she has lived throughout 
her life.  The Board is satisfied that she 
continues to demonstrate a fully independent 
approach and to constructively challenge and 
bring fresh and innovative perspectives to 
Board discussions.

•  P Rew (appointed in 2010). Mr Rew has no prior 

connections with the Group or its 
shareholders. He brings expertise in finance, 
risk, corporate governance and compliance 
and has very significant experience as an 
audit committee chairman in substantial and 

complex organisations. The Board is satisfied 
that Mr Rew continues to demonstrate a fully 
independent approach and to offer 
constructive challenge.

All four INEDs were appointed under the auspices 
of NWL’s Nomination Committee while NWGL 
(then Northumbrian Water Group plc) was a 
separately-listed company with no relationship 
with the current shareholders.

As part of her recent review of the effectiveness 
of the Board and its Committees and Sub-
committee (as detailed on page 79), Professor 
Michelon paid particular attention to the 
independence of the INEDs and whether their 
long tenure may have raised concerns that the 
Board’s decisions are the outcome of group 
thinking. She has assessed this aspect by 
interviewing both INEDs and other members of 
the Board. The interviews specifically covered 
board dynamics during challenging decisions 
taken over the year, to understand how consensus 
was reached. Professor Michelon concluded that 
the Board’s capacity to work cohesively, and reach 
consensus is not attributable to individual 
directors, and the INEDs in particular, lacking 
opinions or independent thinking. On the 
contrary, she noted that it is not unusual for 
Directors to have divergent points of view to start 
with, but through discussions in which pros and 
cons are considered and evaluated, each Director 
is able to share their own personal view before a 
consensual conclusion is reached. In Professor 
Michelon’s expert opinion, all INEDs demonstrate 
the required level of independence to continue to 
perform their roles effectively and contribute to a 
healthy and constructive debate. 

The NWL Board therefore has an excellent 
balance of skills, experience, independence and 
knowledge of the Company. The Executive 
Directors have very significant experience in the 
water sector and other utilities, whilst the INEDs 
make full use of their individual professional 
expertise and personal interests to make a 
significant contribution to addressing the needs 
of all stakeholders and customers.  For example, 
Dr Lyster is a board member of Natural England 
with a strong interest in the environment and 
long-term resilience.  This role is directly relevant 
to NWL’s position as a custodian of the 
environment and Dr Lyster brings an expertise in 
environmental protection as well as an 
understanding of stakeholder perspectives in this 
area.  Similarly, P Rew was a Non-Executive 
Director of Defra until 2018, enabling him to bring 
extensive knowledge of environmental matters 
and stakeholders to his role at NWL.  M A B Nègre 
brings first class knowledge of the global utilities 
sector, whilst M Fay champions customers and 
has excellent contacts across NWL’s north 
eastern operating area.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
The Board therefore believes that the Board and 
Committees, Sub-committee and Sub-groups 
have sufficient independent membership to meet 
the objective but, as outlined above, a fifth INED 
will be appointed during 2020 to further 
strengthen the independent voice on the Board.

In preparation for the recruitment of further 
INEDs during 2020 and 2021, the Board has 
conducted a skills audit to ensure that the Board 
has all the required expertise, including that 
relating to customers and other stakeholders.  
This work has guided the planning of the INED 
recruitment campaign.

Although INEDs are not yet the largest single 
group, they have a strong, influential and 
effective voice.  Professor Michelon’s Board 
performance review has confirmed that, on the 
basis of her interviews with Directors, the INEDs 
assess problems and express judgement 
independently of the shareholders and 
management.  She reports that there is no 
evidence that the long tenure may have impaired 
their individual independent thinking, whereas 
their extensive experience and deep knowledge 
of the Company allow them to act as critical 
friends, speaking their minds with constructive 
scepticism and professionalism.

The non-independent NEDs bring extensive 
knowledge and experience of global 
infrastructure, finance and governance.

(ii)  INEDs are the largest single group on the 

board. 

At the time of publishing this report, there 
are an equal number of INEDs and NEDs on 
the NWL Board.  As confirmed in this report, 
the Company intends to recruit a fifth INED 
during 2020 so that INEDs are the largest 
single group, going forward.

(iii)  The chair is independent of management 

and investors on appointment and 
demonstrates objective judgement 
throughout their tenure.  There is an explicit 
division of responsibilities between running 
the board and executive responsibility for 
running the business. 

The Chairman was not independent of 
investors on appointment, when the 
Company had a single ultimate controlling 
shareholder. The Chairman has 
demonstrated objective judgement 
throughout his tenure, as well as an 
empowering approach which has 
encouraged all directors to participate fully 
in Board discussions.

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

79

(iv)  There is an annual evaluation of the 

performance of the board.  This considers 
the balance of skills, experience, 
independence and knowledge, its diversity, 
how stakeholder needs are addressed and 
how the overarching objectives are met.  
The approach is reported in the annual 
report and any weaknesses are acted on 
and explained. 

There is an annual, independently-
conducted, evaluation of the performance 
of the Board.  In each of the last three years 
this has been conducted by Professor 
Giovanna Michelon, a specialist in 
corporate governance and social 
responsibility, and very good results 
achieved. 

Since 2018, Professor Michelon (a specialist 
in corporate governance and social 
responsibility) has conducted independent 
annual evaluation processes to assess the 
Board’s effectiveness in collectively 
working for the long-term success of the 
Company and fulfilling its three key roles of 
setting the strategic direction of the 
Company, monitoring management 
performance and providing support and 
advice.  Professor Michelon had no 
connection with NWL prior to conducting 
the 2018 evaluation.  P Rew is an advisory 
board member of the business school at 
which Professor Michelon was employed 
until May 2019 but was not involved in her 
appointment. 

Professor Michelon’s 2020 report concluded 
that the Board as a whole is able to reach 
consensus, yet divergent opinions exist and 
constructive discussions are used by 
Directors to share their views, highlight 
pros and cons and consider all relevant 
matters. She further states that the 
evidence gathered during the review 
process does not suggest that group 
thinking is a problem of this Board. More 
specifically: 

(a)  All participating Directors were clearly 
satisfied with the mix of skills and 
experience of both executive and non-
executive (and independent) Directors, 
with the secretarial support and quality 
of documentation and Board minutes;

       (b)  The Chairman’s leadership style was 
described as “inclusive and engaging” 
and able to create an atmosphere where 
all Board members feel comfortable to 
comment and are very appreciative of 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE REPORT 

80

There is a majority of INEDs on the AC, 
Nomination Committee and 
Remuneration Committee.  The latter 
two Committees are chaired by the 
Company’s Chairman, which the Board 
considers appropriate in the context of 
the Company’s ownership structure. 

The INEDs play a leading part in the 
Board committees and sub-
committees.  Importantly, the AC is 
chaired by the SINED and three of the 
four members are INEDs.  The R&CSC 
is, similarly, chaired by the SINED and 
all three members are INEDs.  Professor 
Michelon has described the AC and 
R&CSC focus on ensuring that NWL has 
the resilience and long-term financial 
and operational stability to provide 
customers with a reliable service and 
meet the expectations of other 
stakeholders.  More specifically, the AC 
and R&CSC deliver much of the 
preparatory work on the Annual Report 
and Financial Statements and APR, 
review the work of the internal audit 
function, review risk management and 
advise the Board on risk appetite and 
monitoring compliance with covenants 
and management of debt.  At the AC, 
there is a particular focus on matters 
which directly impact customers, such 
as Guaranteed Standards of Service 
compliance, whilst the R&CSC held 
‘deep dives’ during the year on cyber 
security and the Company’s Intelligent 
Asset Management programme.  The 
AC and R&CSC report fully and frame 
proposals on all these matters for the 
Board to consider.  Therefore, in 
addition to their direct input to the 
Board, the influence of the INEDs and 
their contribution to the running of the 
Company, through the AC and R&CSC, 
is very significant and highly valued.

other people’s opinions during the 
meetings;

       (c)  The risk management process led by the 

Board and its committees was felt to be 
very detailed and thorough, and its 
strengths were tested in response to the 
recent Coronavirus emergency 
confirming a solid system; and

       (d)  Board members fully understand the 

Company’s strategic positioning and its 
public service role; stakeholder 
engagement activities are taking place 
regularly and the key issues in the 
competitive/institutional environments 
and the culture of the Board are aligned 
with the values of the organisation.

Recommendations in the 2020 report 
focused mainly on the nomination process 
for the new INEDs.

       (v)  There is a formal, rigorous and 
transparent procedure for new 
appointments which is led by the 
nomination committee and supports the 
overarching objective. 

There is such a procedure in place. The 
current recruitment campaign will 
involve a leading executive search 
agency to ensure that candidates are 
drawn from as wide a pool as practicable 
and will be consistent with the highest 
standards of best practice.

       (vi)  To ensure there is a clear understanding 
of the responsibilities attached to being 
a non-executive director in this sector, 
companies arrange for the proposed, 
final candidate for new non-executive 
appointments to the regulated company 
board to meet Ofwat ahead of a formal 
appointment being made.

               The Company will adhere to this.

       (vii)  There is a majority of independent 

members on the audit, nomination and 
remuneration committees and the 
audit and remuneration committees 
are independently led. 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUTHORISATION OF DIRECTORS’ 
CONFLICTS OF INTEREST

PR19 BOARD SUB-GROUP/CMA 
BOARD SUB-GROUP 

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

81

As reported in NWL’s last two Governance 
Reports, given the critical importance of our Plan 
proposals, the Board formed a dedicated PR19 
Board Sub-group to provide integrated support 
to both the Board and management in producing 
and assuring NWL’s Business Plan.

The PR19 Board Sub-group worked closely with 
the Company’s full Board, the ELT and relevant 
senior managers below that level, as well as 
external assurance providers and the Board 
approved the submission of the PR19 Business 
Plan on 18 July 2018.

On 31 January 2019, Ofwat published its PR19 
Initial Assessment of Business Plans. The 
Company was disappointed not to receive 
‘enhanced’ status and was required to revise 
some elements of its Plan and the revised Plan 
was submitted on 1 April 2019.

Ofwat published the PR19 FD on 16 December 2019 
and this was discussed by the NWL Board on a 
number of occasions, culminating in the Board’s 
request to Ofwat on 14 February 2020 to refer 
the PR19 FD to the CMA for redetermination. In 
order to support the Board in managing the CMA 
referral the Board established the CMA Board 
Sub-group, which includes all the INEDs, the 
Executive Directors and professional advisers.  
The Sub-group has met regularly to discuss the 
referral and to carefully review the Company’s 
submissions to the CMA, on behalf of the Board.  
The Company’s Statement of Case was approved 
by the full Board prior to submission.

Directors have a statutory duty, under s175 of 
the Companies Act 2006, to avoid a situation 
in which they have, or could have, a conflict of 
interest with the Company’s interests. However, 
there is no breach of this duty if the Board has 
authorised the matter in question. The Articles 
permit Directors (other than the Director having 
the interest in question) to authorise any 
situation giving rise to a known or potential 
conflict. A register of the interests which have 
been authorised is maintained by the Company 
Secretary and is available at every Board meeting. 

WORK OF THE COMMITTEES

Details of the work of the PR19 Board Sub-
group, CMA Board Sub-group, AC, R&CSC and 
Nomination Committee are set out below. 
During the year, in addition to her review of the 
effectiveness of the Board, Professor Michelon 
also conducted a review of the effectiveness 
of the AC and the R&CSC.  The evaluation was 
conducted by means of a questionnaire and 
a number of one-to-one interviews, following 
which Professor Michelon produced a written 
report. The main findings were as follows:

 • Directors were satisfied with the composition 

and chairmanship of the AC and R&CSC;

 • Meeting arrangements were deemed 

satisfactory and efficient;

 • Oversight of external audit, risk management 

and internal controls and assurance is 
considered to be excellent;

 • The AC and R&CSC are working appropriately 

despite an increasing workload; and

 • The quality of feedback to the Board is high.

Professor Michelon also advised that it is 
important to maintain training and technical 
updates and to ensure that the number and 
timing of meetings is kept under review.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

Introduction by the Chairman of the Committee, 
P Rew

The role of the AC is to assist both Executive 
Directors and NEDs of NWL and its subsidiaries 
(the NWL Group) to discharge their individual and 
collective responsibilities in relation to:

•   ensuring the financial and accounting systems 
of each NWL Group company are providing 
accurate and up-to-date information on its 
current position;

•   ensuring the published Financial Statements of 
the NWL Group companies represent a true and 
fair reflection of this position;

•   ensuring the integrity of the Company’s 

regulatory reporting systems and the accuracy 
of its regulatory reports; and

•   assessing the integrity of internal financial 

controls.

The Committee also maintains oversight of 
internal and external auditors. I have worked 
with the members of the Committee and with 
management and key advisors to produce an 
action plan for the Committee, setting out the 
business to be addressed at each meeting. This 
plan is dynamic and is updated throughout the 
year. The members of the Committee are updated 
regularly on developments in financial reporting 
requirements and on any changes in NWL’s 
regulatory environment.

Members of the Audit Committee

The members of the AC are P Rew (Chairman), Dr 
S Lyster, M A B Nègre and L S Chan.

The CEO, Finance Director, Assets and Assurance 
Director, Internal Audit Manager and the external 
auditor normally attend the Committee’s 
meetings by invitation and M Parker is Secretary 
to the Committee. Other senior managers, 
independent technical auditors and advisers are 
invited to attend as appropriate.

The work of the Audit Committee

During the year, and up to the date of approval of 
these Financial Statements, the AC assisted both 
Executive Directors and NEDs to discharge their 
individual and collective responsibilities. Its work 
included the following: 

External Audit

 • reviewing the draft Financial Statements and 
APR, considering reports from the external 
auditor setting out the audit approach and plan, 
significant audit risks and conclusions on the 
NWL Group’s internal controls and risk 
management; 

 • considering the key areas of judgement in the 
Financial Statements, reviewing reports from 

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

82

management, and ensuring these are 
consistent with those set out in note 1(q) to the 
Financial Statements on pages 116 to 117;

 • reviewing the appropriateness of accounting 
policies and evidence supporting the going 
concern basis for the Financial Statements and 
recommending approval of the Financial 
Statements to the Board; 

 • reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of 
the audit process, taking into consideration 
relevant UK professional and regulatory 
requirements; and

 • approving the external auditor’s fees for both 
audit and non-audit services, by reference to 
the agreed policy (see further details below).

The Committee monitors the independence of the 
audit through different reviews and actions 
including:

 • confirmation that the auditor is, in its 

professional judgement, independent of the 
NWL Group;

 • obtaining from it an account of all relationships 
which may affect the firm’s independence and 
the objectivity;

 • rotation of the lead audit partner every five 
years.  NWL’s current lead audit partner first 
signed the Annual Report in 2016 and will rotate 
after the 2020 audit;

 • maintaining a policy regarding the engagement 
of the auditor to conduct non-audit work and 
monitoring the level of audit fees compared to 
non-audit fees (see further details below);

 • considering audit tender requirements, being 

tenders every 10 years and mandatory rotation 
after 20 years.  Deloitte was first appointed in 
respect of the 2012 Annual Report;

 • considering new accounting standards and 

reviewing their applicability to the Company;

 • reviewing the approaches taken to bad debt and 

taxation provisioning as well as unbilled 
revenue recognition; and

 • reviewing reporting from management or the 

external auditor on the accounting judgements 
associated with property, plant and equipment, 
and assumptions taken regarding valuing 
financial instruments and the defined benefit 
pension scheme liability.

In addition, the Committee considers the 
effectiveness of the external audit, and considers 
the level of experience, industry knowledge and 
expertise of the audit team, and its delivery of 
appropriate challenge in a knowledgeable and 
constructive manner.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
Non-Audit Fees

The Company has adopted a formal policy on the 
provision of audit services, which was updated 
with effect from 1 April 2017, to reflect the FRC’s 
Revised Ethical Standards 2016.

The policy provides for general pre-approval of a 
range of services which are generally regarded 
as audit related, where the fees are equal to or 
less than £50,000.  It also sets out a broad range of 
prohibited activities.

Services which are not prohibited, but which have 
not been pre-approved and in respect of which 
the fee is equal to or less than £50,000 can be 
approved by the AC Chairman, who reports such 
approval to the AC. If the fee for such services will 
exceed £50,000 the approval of the AC is required.

The policy imposes a cap on non-audit fees equal 
to 70% of average audit fees for the previous three 
years.

Where Deloitte LLP is engaged to provide non-
audit services, this results from its extensive 
knowledge on NWL’s business and the sector 
generally, as well as demonstrating the required 
expertise and capability to provide good value for 
money.

Non-audit related work undertaken by Deloitte 
LLP in 2019-20 amounted to fees of £14,000, which 
represents 6% of total fees paid to Deloitte LLP.  
The fees paid are set out in note 3 to the Financial 
Statements on page 119.  The non-audit work in 
2019-20 comprised provision of assurance on 
third party contracts.

The AC also holds in camera sessions with the 
audit partner.

Having considered the effectiveness and 
independence assessments above, the AC 
agreed to recommend to the Board that Deloitte 
continues as external auditor.

Internal Audit

The NWL Group operates a blended model for 
its internal audit function. Under this model, 
the internal audit team conducts the majority 
of the work, including core financial controls 
and regulatory reporting reviews. Reviews of 
specialist technical areas are outsourced to firms 
with appropriate experience and qualifications 
when felt necessary.

The Committee reviews and approves the internal 
audit plan for the year. Its review is designed to 
ensure that focus is given to the areas of highest 
risk for the NWL Group and that the audit work 
focuses on key controls. 

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

83

Internal audit reports reviewed by the Committee 
during 2019-20 included: 

•

  April 2019

Process Review – Sewer flooding

Financial Accounting

Wholesale services

Process Review – Service Reservoirs and Water
Tower Inspection Programme

•

  June 2019

Process Review - Appointments

• August 2019

 Process audit – Customer Complaints and
Account Queries

• January 2020

Asset Investment

 Procurement – General policies, purchasing
cards and payment terms

 Procurement – Building Maintenance

Customer Accounts

 CKI/CKHH audit report – GDPR and its
application within the Customer team and
sewerage network maintenance

In addition, at each of its scheduled meetings the 
Committee received reports detailing progress 
with implementing recommendations previously 
raised by internal audit and is satisfied that 
management has taken appropriate steps to 
implement the recommendations raised.

The Chair of the Committee, independent of 
management, maintains regular and direct 
contact with both the internal and external 
auditor, allowing open dialogue and feedback.

The Committee has considered the effectiveness 
of internal audit.  There was also an external 
assessment completed by the Chartered Institute 
of Internal Auditors during 2018/19 which overall 
noted that the function “clearly meets the 
expectations of its stakeholders”. The Committee 
is satisfied that the current model described 
above remains appropriate for the Group.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCE REPORT 

84

Attendance at the five AC meetings during the 
year was as follows:

NAME

P Rew

Dr S Lyster

M A B Nègre

L S Chan

ATTENDANCE

5

5

5

1

N Herrington

(as alternate for L S Chan) 4

P Rew 
Chairman of the Audit Committee

Work with other assurance providers

Support with data assurance work for the 
principal regulatory reporting (including the APR, 
Water Resource Management Plan and PR19 in 
the year) was provided by Deloitte for financial 
tables and PwC or our Internal Audit team for 
non-financial tables.

Our overall approach to assurance of regulatory 
data has been approved by the Committee and is 
described below:

•  business as usual assurance for our ongoing 
data capture and measurement processes;

•  each piece of data must be provided by the 

nominated data provider and reviewed before 
being audited. This is controlled by a workflow 
system; and

•  additional independent technical assurance 

was procured (from PwC as our External 
Technical Auditor) to examine areas that were 
identified as being higher risk as defined by 
our regulatory data risk management 
framework as approved by the Committee. Our 
approach is described in our draft and final 
assurance plans with the results being 
described in our Data Assurance Summary 
annually.

Reports from Deloitte, PwC and Internal Audit are 
received and reviewed by the Committee.

Further compliance and other matters

• reviewing and commenting on the APR,

including the underlying assurance, reviewing
evidence to support the Condition F6A.2A
certificate (statement of sufficiency of financial
resources) and long-term Viability Statement
and recommending their approval to the Board;

• approving arrangements for monitoring

compliance with the Company’s procedures
designed to prevent bribery, having regard to
the Bribery Act 2010 and the code of conduct
‘Our Way at NWG’, including receiving reports
on any whistleblowing allegations;

• management of tax compliance matters and
other tax issues, including Base Erosion and
Profit Shifting and renewing NWL’s Advance
Thin Capitalisation Agreement and discussing
other key matters with HMRC; and

• reviewing the Company’s Long Term Viability

Statement.

The AC Chairman reports formally to the NWL 
Board following each AC meeting, and its minutes 
are circulated to both NWL and NWGL Boards.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTRISK & COMPLIANCE  
SUB-COMMITTEE REPORT

Introduction by the Chairman of the  
Sub-committee, P Rew 
The role of the Sub-committee is to assist both 
Executive and NEDs to discharge their individual 
and collective responsibilities in relation to 
assessing the scope and effectiveness of the 
NWL Group’s risk management systems and the 
integrity of its internal financial controls.

Members of the Risk & Compliance  
Sub-committee 
The members of the R&CSC are P Rew (Chairman), 
Dr S Lyster and M A B Nègre.

The work of the Risk & Compliance  
Sub-committee 
The ELT implements policies on risk management 
and internal control and ensures that risks are 
appropriately identified and managed within the 
business, to ensure that the Company’s resources 
and capacity to deliver services as required by 
customers remain resilient. This approach is set 
out in a Risk Management Framework, which has 
been endorsed by the R&CSC. The ELT reviews the 
approach to risk management in detail every year 
and reviews the significant risks every month. 
Any significant issues are reported by the CEO to 
the Board. Senior management implements 
policies on risk management and internal control. 

The R&CSC, on behalf of the Board, has performed 
a robust assessment of the principal risks facing 
the Company, including those that would threaten 
its business model, resilience, future 
performance, solvency or liquidity. These 
principal risks, and how they are managed,  
are described on pages 57 to 63 in the  
Strategic Report. 

The internal control framework supports the risk 
management process, ensuring that risks are 
appropriately managed, that controls are effective 
and that appropriate remedial action is taken 
where identified. Risks are mapped against the 
providers of assurance, whether this be 
management, internal or external assurance. The 
Board is supported by the AC in monitoring the 
effectiveness of the internal control framework 
with primary assurance being provided by the 
internal audit team. 

The R&CSC, on behalf of the Board, has carried out 
an annual review of the effectiveness of the 
Company’s risk management and internal control 
systems. This review confirmed that the 
Company has strong systems of internal control 
and robust processes in place to enable it to 
identify, evaluate and manage the risks it faces 
and to ensure that its obligations are met. These 

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

85

systems and processes are embedded in the 
organisation and are reviewed regularly by the 
Board, its Committees and Sub-committee. The 
annual review confirmed that the risk 
management and internal control systems have 
operated effectively through the year and that 
there have been no significant failings or 
weaknesses. 

During the year, and up to the date of approval of 
these Financial Statements, the work of the 
R&CSC included the following: 

 • reviewing reports at each meeting on the 
top-rated managed risks and priorities for 
assurance (being those risks with the biggest 
reduction between the business (gross) and 
managed (net) risk scores), representing key 
control areas for the Company; 

 • reviewing high impact, low likelihood risks 
which have a rare to unlikely likelihood of 
occurrence but a potentially catastrophic level 
of impact; 

 • reviewing the management of specific areas of 
risk in relation to a major business change 
project iAM and business continuity 
arrangements;

 • advising the Board on risk appetite and 

exposure and reviewing risk assessment 
processes as well as keeping the effectiveness 
of the risk and internal control management 
systems under review;

 • monitoring compliance with covenants and 

treasury risks; 

 • reviewing management of customer debt; 

 • “deep dives” on cyber security and the iAM 

programme; and

 • reviewing the risk and control framework and 

reporting.

Attendance at the three scheduled R&CSC 
meetings during the year was as follows:

NAME

P Rew 

Dr S Lyster 

M A B Nègre 

ATTENDANCE

3

3

3

The Sub-committee holds a special meeting with 
other members of the Board each year to conduct 
a separate Strategic Risk review exercise.

The Board is able to monitor the impact of 
environmental, social and governance matters on 
the Company’s business, to assess the impact of 
significant risks on the business and to evaluate 
methods of managing these risks through reports 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
it receives from the AC and the R&CSC.

Principle Three – Director Responsibilities 

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

86

The board and individual directors should have a 
clear understanding of their accountability and 
responsibilities.  The board’s policies and 
procedures should support effective decision-
making and independent challenge. 
The Company has in place clear corporate 
governance practices which provide clear lines of 
accountability and responsibility.  The members 
of the ELT have clearly defined responsibilities 
and levels of authority are set out in Financial 
Approval Rules (as explained in the comments in 
relation to Objective 2 of the 2019 Ofwat 
Objectives on page 76. The Board’s approach to 
conflicts of interest and the relationship between 
the Company and its owners is also explained in 
that section of the Report.

The Chairman and Company Secretary discuss 
governance processes from time to time to 
confirm they remain fit for purpose and consider 
initiatives which could strengthen governance.

Details of the Board Committees are set out in the 
comments on Ofwat’s 2019 Objective 4, on pages 
78 to 80.

Details of processes which are in place to ensure 
systems and controls are operating effectively 
and that information provided to the Board is 
robust are set out throughout this document and 
in the Company’s APR and Data Assurance 
Summary.

Principle Four – Opportunity and Risk

A board should promote the long-term 
sustainable success of the company by 
identifying opportunities to create and preserve 
value, and establishing oversight for the 
identification and mitigation of risks. 
The Company is a long term business and 
ensuring its long term sustainable success is a 
key driver underpinning the work of the Board 
and Committees, as described in detail in this 
Report. The Board’s approach to oversight of the 
identification and mitigation of risks is detailed 
in the Risk Report on pages 57 to 63.

Principle Five – Remuneration

A board should promote executive remuneration 
structures aligned to the long-term sustainable 
success of a company, taking into account pay 
and conditions elsewhere in the company.
A detailed explanation of the Company’s 
executive pay policy is provided in the 
Remuneration Committee Report on  
pages 88 to 99.

P Rew 
Chairman of the Risk & Compliance 
Sub-committee

NOMINATION COMMITTEE 

The Nomination Committee has wide-ranging 
terms of reference which are available on the 
Company’s website.  The members during the 
year were A J Hunter (Chairman), P Rew, M Fay, 
Dr S Lyster and D N Macrae.  The Committee met 
once formally during the year, principally to 
discuss the recruitment of a fifth INED and the 
plan for the existing four INEDs to step down 
during 2020/21 and be succeeded by new 
appointees.  There were further ad hoc 
discussions as required through the year.

COMPLIANCE WITH THE 
WATES PRINCIPLES

The Board considers that it complies 
substantially with the relevant provisions of the 
Wates Principles, through the corporate 
governance arrangements described in detail 
above, and the further arrangements set out 
below.

Principle One – Purpose and Leadership

An effective Board develops and promotes the 
purpose of a company, and ensures that its 
values, strategy and culture align with that 
purpose. 

Please see the comments on compliance with 
Objective 1 of the 2019 Ofwat Objectives, on pages 
74 to 80.

Principle Two – Board Composition 

Effective board composition requires an effective 
chair and a balance of skills, backgrounds, 
experience and knowledge, with individual 
directors having sufficient capacity to make a 
valuable contribution.  The size of a board should 
be guided by the scale and complexity of the 
company. 

Please see the comments on compliance with 
Objective 4 of the 2019 Ofwat Objectives, on pages 
74 to 80.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCE REPORT 

87

Principle Six – Stakeholder Relationships and 
Engagement

Directors should foster effective stakeholder 
relationships aligned to the company’s purpose. 
The board is responsible for overseeing 
meaningful engagement with stakeholders, 
including the workforce, and having regard to 
their views when taking decisions.
Details of the Company’s extensive stakeholder 
engagement programme are set out on pages 17 
to 18.

CODE OF CONDUCT

The Group has a code of conduct, ‘Our Way at 
NWG’, covering its relationships with customers, 
employees, suppliers, local communities, 
shareholders, other investors and regulators. This 
document provides clear guidance to employees 
in relation to personal conduct, conflicts of 
interest, the anti-bribery policy and a number of 
other matters. As part of the annual staff 
appraisal system, all employees are required to 
confirm that they have seen the code of conduct

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCE REPORT 

88

REMUNERATION 
COMMITTEE REPORT

• agreeing STIP payments for the 2019 calendar
year, including reviewing performance against
the balanced scorecard measures;

• agreeing the level at which the LTIP award in
respect of the 2019 calendar year would vest;

• considering and agreeing changes to the

structures of the STIP and LTIP, which increased
the proportion of measures delivering benefits
for customers and other stakeholders, other
than shareholders, to 60%;

• setting performance targets for the STIP for

Executive Directors and senior managers for
the 2020 calendar year in accordance with the
revised structure, reflecting all of the corporate
themes in our balanced scorecard to deliver
benefits for all stakeholders and ensuring that
targets are set at stretching levels aligned to
industry-leading performance; and

• setting performance targets for the LTIP

scheme for the award in respect of the 2020
calendar year in accordance with the revised
structure, reflecting a sub-set of the balanced
scorecard measures which deliver benefits for
our stakeholders.

Decisions in respect of pay awards and STIP and 
LTIP were made in January 2020 before the 
outbreak of the Covid-19 pandemic. The 
Committee will consider at its meetings during 
2020/21 whether or not it would be appropriate to 
make any adjustments to Directors’ remuneration 
in the light of the impact of Covid-19.

A J Hunter 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

The following report has been produced in 
accordance with section 35A of the Water 
Industry Act 1991. It also has regard to the 
requirements of the Large and Medium-sized 
Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
(Amendment) Regulations 2013 in respect of 
directors’ remuneration reporting for quoted 
companies, albeit in the context of a company 
which is not a listed public limited company.

ANNUAL STATEMENT

The work of the Remuneration Committee 
comprises the adoption of principles and 
standards in relation to executive remuneration 
and benefits, as well as agreeing individual 
remuneration packages. All decisions regarding 
Directors’ remuneration are taken by the 
Remuneration Committee, other than where 
stated.

Members of the Remuneration Committee

The members of the Remuneration Committee 
during the year were A J Hunter (Chairman), P 
Rew, M Fay, Dr  S Lyster and D N Macrae. H 
Mottram attends Committee meetings but does 
not participate in discussions relating to her own 
remuneration. There is a majority of INEDs in 
accordance with the Ofwat Principles.

The work of the Remuneration Committee

The Remuneration Committee met twice during 
the year, in May 2019 and January 2020. All 
members attended the meetings.

The Committee discussed and agreed changes to 
the structures of the Short Term Incentive Plan 
(STIP) and Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP), to 
take effect from 2020. This will increase to 60% 
the proportion of performance-related executive 
pay aligned to delivering benefits for our 
customers across our stretching balanced 
scorecard targets. The changes are described in 
more detail on pages 98 to 99.

Set out below is a brief summary of the work of 
the Committee:

• reviewing Executive pay and Non-Executive

Directors’ fees, taking account of market data,
and agreed annual pay awards to take effect
from 1 January 2020;

• considering an assurance report from the

Internal Audit Manager on performance against
targets reflected in the 2019 STIP and LTIP;

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTDIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY

The policy of the Remuneration Committee is to 
pay no more than necessary to attract and retain 
good quality directors, and to ensure that policy is 
aligned with market practice. For Executive 
Directors the reward policy is designed to achieve 
a balance between attraction, reward for 
performance and retention, and salaries are 
based on relevant market benchmarks, which are 
reviewed typically every three years. For Non-
Executive Directors, fees paid reflect market 
practice for similar sized companies, and may be 
enhanced for roles leading Board Committees.

Executive Directors

The remuneration of the Executive Directors 
comprises:

• basic salary;

• benefits in kind;

• a performance related STIP;

• annual LTIP awards; and

• pension benefits.

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

89

In addition to reviewing each constituent 
element, the Remuneration Committee reviews 
the remuneration packages as a whole to ensure 
that they remain appropriate in terms of 
structure and quantum. In 2012 the Remuneration 
Committee restructured the remuneration of the 
Executive Directors, with advice from Hay Group, 
independent external reward consultants. This 
resulted in a reduction in the value of 
performance related STIP and LTIP awards, offset 
by an adjustment to basic pay. The Remuneration 
Committee is satisfied that this balance between 
fixed and performance related remuneration 
remains appropriate.

A significant proportion of remuneration is linked 
to Company performance through the short-term 
and long-term incentive plans, with 50% of the 
CEO’s maximum remuneration being linked to 
performance and around 40% for the other 
Executive Directors, as illustrated on page 92.

The remuneration policy is designed to 
incentivise performance across all the full range 
of the Company’s strategic themes and not to 
over-emphasise short-term financial gains. The 
following table describes the policy in more 
detail, explaining the purpose of each component, 
how the policy operates and, for the variable 
elements of remuneration, the maximum amount 
payable and how performance is assessed.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTPURPOSE

OPERATION

PERFORMANCE 
ASSESSMENT

MAXIMUM PAYABLE

GOVERNANCE REPORT  90

Basic salary

Basic salaries are set at a 
level to attract and retain 
Directors with the 
leadership capabilities to 
deliver the Company’s 
vision of being the 
national leader in the 
provision of sustainable 
water and wastewater 
services	and	to	reflect	the	
external market.

Benefits in kind

Basic salary is reviewed 
annually based on 
individual contributions, 
periodic benchmarking to 
the external market and 
with regard to the 
expected pay award for 
other groups of 
employees.

The basic salaries payable to 
Directors of NWL are not 
directly	linked	to	specific	
standards of performance in 
connection with the carrying 
out of functions of a ‘relevant 
undertaker’. There is no 
variable performance related 
element.

Fixed annual amount 
determined annually by 
the Remuneration 
Committee.

Other employment 
benefits	provided	in	
accordance with the 
Company’s policy on 
provision	of	benefits	to	all	
staff.

Benefits	provided	to	
the Executive Directors 
comprise car and fuel 
allowances, healthcare 
and professional 
subscriptions.

There is no variable 
performance related element.

Fixed annual amount set 
in accordance with the 
Company’s policies on 
provision	of	benefits	to	all	
staff.

The maximum STIP 
payable, as a percentage 
of basic salary, is 70% for 
the CEO and 50% for the 
other Executive Directors.

STIP

The purpose of the STIP 
is to focus on delivering 
key business performance 
targets in the year.

The performance targets 
are	firmly	linked	to	NWL’s	
strategic themes 
(customer, environment, 
competitiveness, people 
and communities) as 
reported in the balanced 
scorecard. Stretching 
targets are set which are 
aligned to the Company’s 
vision of being the 
national leader in the 
provision of sustainable 
water and wastewater 
services.

The STIP is assessed on 
a calendar year basis. 
Awards are paid in cash 
with no deferral, other 
than	for	specific	reasons,	
such as a performance 
metric	not	being	finalised	
at the point of award.

A clawback applies in the 
event that results on 
which the STIP is paid are 
subsequently found to be 
inaccurate or there has 
been relevant misconduct 
on the part of the 
employee.

The STIP is structured with 
three elements, determined 
by the Remuneration 
Committee:

•  up to 50% payable on

financial	targets;

•  up to 40% payable on
balanced scorecard
targets;	and

•  up to 10% payable on
performance against
personal targets.

The Chairman retains the 
right to award an additional 
discretionary bonus to the 
CEO, taking account of 
overall performance.

The structure will change in 
2020/21 to:

•  up to 40% payable on
financial	targets;	and

•  up to 60% payable on
balanced scorecard
targets.

table continued...

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTPURPOSE

OPERATION

PERFORMANCE 
ASSESSMENT

MAXIMUM PAYABLE

GOVERNANCE REPORT 

91

The LTIP is structured with 
50% related to delivery of 
expected distributions to 
Group shareholders in line with 
the Board approved plan and 
50% related to achievement 
of	the	Group	profit	after	tax	
target. For each element, there 
will be no vesting if less than 
97.5% of the target value is 
achieved, increasing on a 
sliding scale to 50% vesting if 
100% of the target is achieved 
and 100% vesting if 105% of 
the target is achieved.

The structure will change in 
2020/21 to:

•  up to 40% payable on
financial	targets;	and

•  up to 60% payable on

balanced scorecard targets.

There is no variable 
performance related element.

LTIP

Our LTIP is structured 
differently from others 
in the sector and is 
designed to operate 
as a modest retention 
mechanism only.

The LTIP is a cash 
based award, with 
deferred payment.

Vesting of the LTIP is 
based on performance 
in	the	first	calendar	year	
after award. Payment 
is deferred until the 
completion of four 
years from the start 
of the performance 
period.

Pension

Pension	benefits	are	
provided at a level 
to	reflect	market	
expectations.

The Company operates 
the Northumbrian 
Water Pension Scheme 
(NWPS or the Scheme) 
which	has	defined	
benefit	and	defined	
contribution sections. 
The	defined	benefit	
section closed to 
new entrants on 31 
December 2007.

More details of the 
NWPS are provided in 
note 23 of the Financial 
Statements.

The maximum LTIP payable, as 
a percentage of basic salary, is 
50% for the CEO and 30% for 
the other Executive Directors.

H Mottram left the NWPS in 2016 
and receives additional salary 
payments in lieu of pension 
contributions.

C I Johns participates in the 
defined	contribution	section	of	
the NWPS, making an employee 
contribution of 8% of basic 
salary	(under	a	salary	sacrifice	
arrangement) and receiving an 
employer contribution of 15% of 
salary, up to the annual pension 
contribution taxation limit, and 
additional salary payments in lieu 
of pension contributions.

A C Jones participated in a 
defined	benefit	section	during	
the year, making an employee 
contribution of 8% of pensionable 
salary	(under	a	salary	sacrifice	
arrangement) and receiving an 
employer contribution equivalent 
to 25.5% of pensionable salary. 
Benefits	are	calculated	on	a	
career average revalued earnings 
basis with future accrual at 1/45th 
of salary per annum.

A C Jones stopped being an 
active member of the NWPS 
during the year and now receives 
additional salary payments in lieu 
of pension contributions.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTILLUSTRATION OF 
REMUNERATION POLICY

The graphs below show for each Executive 
Director, for the proportion of their remuneration 
borne by the Company:

 • the base level of remuneration, which is not 

dependent upon performance and comprises 
basic salary, benefits in kind and pension;

 • the expected level of remuneration, reflecting a 
typical level of performance against targets for 
the STIP and LTIP; and

 • the maximum level of remuneration, if all STIP 

and LTIP performance targets were fully 
achieved.

GOVERNANCE REPORT  92

For H Mottram, 50% of maximum remuneration is 
linked to Company performance through the STIP 
and LTIP. For C I Johns and A C Jones, the 
equivalent proportions are 40%.

For the purposes of the graph, the expected level 
of performance for the STIP has been assumed to 
achieve 60% of the maximum potential value and 
the LTIP has been assumed to achieve 50% of the 
maximum value, though awards are dependent 
upon actual performance.

Information on actual awards for the STIP and 
LTIP in respect of 2019 is provided on pages 94 to 
96.

H MOTTRAM

Base

100%

Expected

64%

23% 13%

Maximum

50%

29%

21%

£k

424

665

855

%ge

Salary, benefits  
& pension

%ge

STIP

%ge

LTIP

0

300

600

900

£’000

C I JOHNS

Base

100%

18%

Expected

73%

9%

Maximum

60%

25% 15%

0

300

600

900

£’000

A C JONES

Base

100%

Expected

73%

9%

18%

Maximum

60%

25%

15%

0

300

600

900

£’000

£k

229

315

381

£k

332

455

550

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

FEES

OTHER COMPONENTS OF 
REMUNERATION

REMUNERATION ELSEWHERE IN 
THE GROUP

GOVERNANCE REPORT  93

The Company’s policy is that the 
Independent Non-Executive 
Directors receive fees for their 
duties. The level of fees is set by 
reference to the market.  

The Non-Executive Directors do not 
receive	benefits	in	kind	and	do	not 	
participate in the STIP, LTIP or 
pension schemes operated by the 
Company.

An additional fee is paid to the Chair 
of	the	Audit	Committee	to	reflect	the 	
additional responsibilities and time 
commitment involved.  

The INEDs do not receive any other 
remuneration from the Company, 
the Group or its shareholders.  

In respect of the Non-Executive 
Directors appointed by the Group’s 
shareholders, F R Frame received 
the same base fee for performing his 
duties as a Director of both the 
Company and NWGL. This fee is 
shared with NWL paying a 30% 
proportion and NWGL paying the 
remaining 70%. The other Non-
Executive Directors receive no 
remuneration from the Company.

SERVICE CONTRACTS

The service contracts of Executive Directors have 
a notice period of six months from either side.

The contracts do not contain any specific 
provisions related to payment for loss of office. 
Any such payments would be at the discretion of 
the Remuneration Committee and would take 
account of the contractual notice period and any 
STIP payments considered to have been earned. 
LTIP awards will typically lapse, although the 
Remuneration Committee may approve payment 
of outstanding LTIP awards if a Director is 
considered to be a ‘good leaver’, for example upon 
retirement.

INEDs are engaged on a contract for services with 
a notice period of six months from either side. No 
payment is made for loss of office other than 
accrued fees.

The other NEDs do not have service contracts 
with the Company, and receive no payment from 
the Company.

APPROACH TO REMUNERATION 
ON RECRUITMENT

Newly appointed Directors are remunerated in 
accordance with the policy set out in this report. 
Service contracts for new Directors have a notice 
period of six months from either side.

CONSIDERATION OF 
SHAREHOLDER VIEWS

The Remuneration Committee comprises two 
shareholder-appointed Directors and three INEDs. 
In the context of a private company with NWL’s 
ownership structure, this ensures that the views 
of the shareholder are taken into account when 
setting executive remuneration, whilst also 
maintaining a strong independent presence on 
the Committee.

CONSIDERATION OF EMPLOYMENT 
CONDITIONS ELSEWHERE IN 
THE COMPANY

The Remuneration Committee reviews Directors’ 
pay on an annual basis, taking account of market 
trend information and pay awards for the wider 
workforce in the Company. Whilst Directors’ 
remuneration is not specifically consulted on 
with employees, in general, annual pay awards 
for Directors reflect the target pay awards for the 
workforce, which are subject to consultation 
under the Company’s Employee Relations 
Framework. The incentive pay arrangements for 
executives are not mirrored elsewhere, but are 
considered to be relatively modest in comparison 
with market comparisons.

Directors’ remuneration packages are 
benchmarked against market data on a periodic 
basis, typically every three years, with support 
from external advisers. The salary benchmarking 
is reviewed annually for senior managers and 
every three years for the wider workforce.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
GOVERNANCE REPORT  94

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION IN 2019/20 (AUDITED)

The table below shows the total remuneration paid by the Company to Directors during the year, along 
with comparative information for the previous year. The table has been produced in accordance with 
the requirements of Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
(Amendment) Regulations 2013.

SALARIES 
AND FEES 
£’000

BENEFITS IN 
KIND £’000

STIP 
£’000

LTIP 
£’000

PENSION 
£’000

TOTAL 
REMUNERATION 
£’000

2020

2019

2020

2019

2020

2019

2020

2019

2020

2019

2020

2019

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

H Mottram

375

366

C I Johns

193

189

9

8

A C Jones

283

276

13

M Fay

F R Frame

Dr S Lyster

M A B Nègre

P Rew

48

11

48

48

65

47

14

47

47

62

-

-

-

-

-

9

10

19

-

-

-

-

-

158

192

46

65

-

-

-

-

-

47

67

-

-

-

-

-

44

14

20

-

-

-

-

-

41

27

44

-

-

-

-

-

40

25

26

-

-

-

-

-

583

274

405

48

11

48

48

65

-

-

-

-

-

651

285

408

47

14

47

47

62

1,071

1,048

30

38

269

306

78

112

91

1,482

1,561

BENEFITS

Taxable benefits provided to the Executive 
Directors comprise car and fuel allowance, 
healthcare and professional subscriptions. The 
values are not significant in the context of overall 
remuneration.

STIP

The STIP for the 2019 calendar year was 
structured by the Committee in accordance with 
the policy outlined above, as follows:

 • up to 50% payable on balanced scorecard 

financial targets;

 • up to 40% payable on balanced scorecard 

non-financial targets; and

 • up to 10% payable on performance against 

personal targets.

The table shows only the proportion of 
remuneration borne by the Company. For two of 
the Directors, H Mottram and C I Johns, NWL paid 
70% of their remuneration and NWGL paid the 
remaining 30%.  For F R Frame, NWL paid 30% of 
his remuneration and NWGL paid the remaining 
70%. For the other Directors reported in the table, 
NWL paid 100% of their remuneration.

The Executive Directors receive salary payments 
in lieu of employer pension contributions. These 
payments are reported under the pension 
heading in the table.

BASIC SALARY

Basic salary is set by reference to market data 
and trends.

For the calendar year 2019, senior executives 
were awarded an annual increase in their basic 
salaries of 2.5%. This was the same as the level 
awarded to other senior managers, but less than 
that awarded to other employees of 2.8%.

For the calendar year 2020, senior executives 
were awarded an annual increase in their basic 
salaries of 2.5%. This was the same as the level 
awarded to other senior managers and other 
employees.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT 

95

The balanced scorecard measures and targets, and performance against the targets in the year, are 
shown in the table below. These targets are internal measures set at stretching levels so as to drive 
year on year performance improvements on a path to deliver our ‘national leader’ vision.  This means 
that they are often more stretching than the regulatory PCs reported in the Performance Review 
section on pages 22 to 23.

SCORECARD MEASURE

TARGET

PERFORMANCE

ACHIEVED

% OF TOTAL 
AWARDED

% OF TOTAL 
STIP POTENTIAL

Customer

Customer satisfaction

- SIM qualitative score

>=4.65

- SIM quantitative score

Water supply interruptions 
>3 hours (average 
minutes per property)

<=75

<=3:45

Mean zonal compliance

>=99.97

Repeat	sewer	flooding	
(properties)

<=60

Environment

Leakage (Mld)

- NW

- ESW

Pollution incidents 
category 1 & 2

Sewage treatment works 
failing consent

Competitiveness

Group Earnings Before 
Interest and Taxes (EBIT)

Group cash available for 
distribution

People

Employee engagement 
score

Lost time reportable 
accidents (no.)

Communities

Ethisphere

4.5

94.19

9:12

99.94

60

136.3

64.2

1

98.84

<=134

<=66

<=1

>=99

budget

not achieved

budget

achieved

>=80

<=3

67

7

no

no

no

no

yes

no

yes

yes

no

no

yes

no

no

-

-

-

-

4

-

2

4

-

-

25

-

-

4

39

3

1

4

4

4

2

2

4

4

25

25

4

4

4

90

award

awarded

yes

Total STIP related to balanced scorecard

The personal targets related to the delivery of strategic objectives relevant to each Director’s role.

A number of these targets related to NWL’s performance as a relevant undertaker. In assessing overall 
performance, the Committee takes into account the Company’s position in Ofwat reports.

For the CEO, in addition to the STIP calculation explained above, a further discretionary award was 
made by the Committee to reflect the Board’s continued satisfaction with the CEO’s performance. This 
remained within the limit of the overall potential maximum STIP award.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
The total STIP awards for 2019 were as follows:

PENSION

GOVERNANCE REPORT  96

Pension arrangements operated in accordance 
with the policy outlined on page 91.

A C Jones was an active member of the defined 
benefit section of the NWPS until January 2020, 
therefore the pension value shown in the table on 
page 94 has been calculated in accordance with 
the 2013 Regulations and represents the 
estimated increase in the capital value of his 
pension in the year.

PERCENTAGE CHANGE IN CEO 
REMUNERATION

The table below shows the change in 
remuneration for 2019/20 compared to 2018/19 for 
the CEO and for other employees. In order to 
make a meaningful comparison, other employees 
includes only those who have been employed for 
the full two year period and excludes senior 
management whose remuneration is set by the 
Remuneration Committee. STIP has been 
compared to the annual bonus paid to the senior 
management cohort.

CHANGE IN CEO 
REMUNERATION

CHANGE 
IN OTHER 
EMPLOYEES’ 
REMUNERATION

Salaries and fees

Benefits	in	kind

2.7%

0.9%

STIP / annual bonus

(18.2%)

4.6%

(0.7%)

(4.0%)

STIP 
awarded 
(out of 
100%)

MAXIMUM 
STIP (% 
OF BASIC 
SALARY)

H Mottram

C I Johns

A C Jones

62.4%

48.0%

48.0%

70%

50%

50%

STIP 
AWARDED 
(% OF 
BASIC 
SALARY)

43.7%

24.0%

24.0%

LTIP

A cash LTIP was awarded by the Committee in 
2019, structured in accordance with the policy 
outlined above, as follows:

 • up to 50% payable on achievement of the Group 

profit after tax target; and

 • up to 50% payable on delivery of expected 

distributions to Group shareholders.

The scheme related to the period January 2019 to 
December 2022. Performance targets were 
assessed in the first year of the scheme with 
payment deferred until early 2023, after the end 
of the four year scheme period.

The Committee assessed the performance 
against the scheme criteria in January 2020 and 
determined that neither Group profit performance 
or Group distributions should vest. The 
Committee therefore approved that the 2019 LTIP 
should vest at 0%.

The total LTIP awards for 2019 were as follows:

LTIP 
awarded 
(out of 
100%)

MAXIMUM 
LTIP (% 
OF BASIC 
SALARY)

LTIP 
AWARDED 
(% OF BASIC 
SALARY)

H Mottram

C I Johns

A C Jones

0%

0%

0%

50%

30%

30%

0%

0%

0%

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT  97

CEO PAY RATIO

The Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) 
Regulations 2018 introduced new legislation in 
respect of reporting ratio of CEO pay compared to 

other employees. The table below shows this 
information produced in accordance with the 
legislation.

YEAR

METHOD

25TH PERCENTILE 
RATIO

MEDIAN PAY RATIO

75TH PERCENTILE 
RATIO

2020

2019

Option A

Option A

20:1

22:1

16:1

17:1

12:1

14:1

The Company has chosen Option A (as set out in 
the said Regulations) for calculating the pay ratio 
on the basis that it represents the most complete 
data set. The employees representing each of the 
percentiles were based on the full year 
remuneration of staff employed throughout the 
year. The pension cost for those employees in the 
defined benefit section of the pension scheme 

have been calculated based on the estimated 
employer contributions as applying the method 
set out in section 229 of the Finance Act 2004 for 
all members would not be practical. Under Option 
A, the value of the full-year remuneration of each 
relevant employee is listed in order from lowest 
to highest and the values at the 25th, 50th and 
75th percentile points identified.

£000

25TH PERCENTILE 
EMPLOYEE

MEDIAN PAY 
EMPLOYEE

75TH PERCENTILE 
EMPLOYEE

Salary	component	of	pay	and	benefits

Total	pay	and	benefits

20

29

28

38

39

48

CEO REMUNERATION OVER TIME

Since the current remuneration policy was put in 
place in 2012, the basic salary of the CEO has 
increased by the same as, or less than, the 
average pay award for the majority of employees 
each year, which has been targeted to ensure we 
keep pace with the general cost of living. Over the 
same period, the maximum potential bonus 
available under the STIP and LTIP has remained a 
constant proportion of salary and the actual 
bonuses awarded have increased year on year by 
less than 2%. 

RELATIVE IMPORTANCE OF SPEND 
ON PAY

The table below shows total staff costs and 
dividends paid for the current and prior years, 
and the year on year change.

2020 
£’M

2019 
£’M

CHANGE 
%

Staff costs (note 5)

150.1

144.7

3.7%

Dividends (note 8)

65.0

130.0

(50.0%)

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT  98

CHANGES TO FUTURE REMUNERATION POLICY 

At its meeting in January 2020, the Remuneration Committee agreed to revise the structures of the 
STIP and LTIP, taking effect from 2020, to increase the proportion of performance-related executive pay 
which is aligned to delivering benefits for our customers.

For the STIP the 10% proportion related to personal targets will be removed and the proportion linked 
to non-financial balanced scorecard measures will increase to 60%. The Remuneration Committee will 
review the structure annually and may choose to revise the individual measures within the STIP to 
reflect appropriate performance objectives but the 60% weighting for customer-focused measures will 
not be reduced.

For the LTIP, the proportion linked to financial metrics, Group profit after tax and Group distributions, 
will be reduced to 40% with the remaining 60% linked to customer and environmental balanced 
scorecard measures.

STIP

The balanced scorecard targets for 2020/21 are shown in the table below, in accordance with the 
revised policy. These are internal measures set at stretching levels so as to drive year on year 
performance improvements on a path to deliver our ‘national leader’ vision.

TARGET

%OF TOTAL STIP 
POTENTIAL

SCORECARD MEASURE

Customer

C-MeX experience

C-MeX customer service

D-MeX experience

Unplanned interruptions >3 hours (mm:ss per property) 1

Compliance risk index (number) 1

Repeat	sewer	flooding	(number)	 1

Internal	sewer	flooding	(number)	 1

Environment

Leakage – NW (Mld) 1

Leakage – ESW (Mld) 1

Discharge permit compliance (EPA 1)

Pollution incidents category 1 & 2 1

Greenhouse gas emissions (ktCO2e) 1

Competitiveness

Group EBIT

Group distributions

People

Employee engagement score (Trust Index) (%)

Lost time reportable accidents (number)

Communities

top 2 company

top 2 company

top 2 company

<=5:24

<=2

<=46

<=285

<=126.5

<=56.4

>=99%

<=1

<=57.2

budget

budget

>=65

<=3

2.5

2.5

5

5

5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

5

5

5

20

20

5

5

5

100

BITC Platinum Plus/Ethisphere/CCW ‘Most Trusted Water Company’

awarded

Total

1   Where stretching targets are set which are designed to achieve industry leading performance, the 

Remuneration Committee has agreed that if the target score is not achieved but actual performance 
is at an industry leading level and has shown an improvement on prior year performance, the target 
will be deemed to have been achieved.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT  99

LTIP 2020

The LTIP targets for the 2020 scheme are shown in the table below, in accordance with the revised 
policy.  These are internal measures set at stretching levels so as to drive year on year performance 
improvements on a path to deliver our ‘national leader’ vision. This means that they are often more 
stretching than the regulatory PCs reported in the Performance Review section on pages 22 and 23.

SCORECARD MEASURE

Customer & Environment

C-MeX customer service

Unplanned interruptions >3 hours (mm:ss per property)

Compliance risk index (number)

Internal	sewer	flooding	(number)

Leakage – NW (Mld)

Leakage – ESW (Mld)

Pollution incidents category 1 & 2

Competitiveness

Group	profit	after	tax

Group distributions

Total

TARGET

% OF TOTAL LTIP 
POTENTIAL

top 2 company

<=5:24

<=2

<=285

<=126.5

<=56.4

<=1 (cat 2)

budget

budget

10

10

10

10

5

5

10

20

20

100

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT

GOVERNANCE REPORT  100

The Company’s response to the pandemic is 
described in the CEO Review. Both the going 
concern statement and viability statement, on 
pages 102 to 103 of this Directors’ Report, explain 
how the impacts of the pandemic have been 
taken into account in making the judgements set 
out in the statements.

STATEMENT OF CORPORATE 
GOVERNANCE ARRANGEMENTS

The Company’s corporate governance 
arrangements are described on pages 86 to 87 of 
the Governance Report. In accordance with the 
requirements of our Licence, we report our 
corporate governance arrangements against the 
2019 Objectives set by Ofwat. We also report 
compliance with the Wates Principles, which are 
appropriate for large privately owned companies.

POLITICAL DONATIONS

NWL does not support any political party and we 
do not, directly or through any subsidiary, make 
what are commonly regarded as donations to any 
political party or other political organisation. 
However, the wide definition of donations in the 
Political Parties, Elections and Referendums Act 
2000 covers activities which form part of the 
necessary relationship between the Company 
and political parties and political organisations. 
These activities include attending party 
conferences, as these provide the best 
opportunity to meet a range of stakeholders, both 
national and local, to explain our activities, as 
well as local meetings with MPs, MEPs and their 
agents. During the year, no external costs were 
associated with these activities, however, 
Company representatives attended the party 
conferences of the Labour and Conservative 
parties.

DIRECTORS

The Directors who served during the year, and to 
the date of signing, are listed on pages 69 to 71 of 
the Governance Report.

DISCLOSURES PROVIDED 
IN THE STRATEGIC REPORT

Future developments which may impact on the 
Company are described in the CEO’s Report and 
in the Strategic Report.

Our approach to research and innovation is 
described in the Performance Review section of 
our Strategic Report under the Competitiveness 
heading and the costs of research and 
development are disclosed in note 3 of the 
Financial Statements.

Our policies in respect of the employment of 
disabled persons are set out in the Performance 
Review section of our Strategic Report under 
Diversity and Equal opportunities on pages 44  
to 45.

Information on results and dividends and capital 
structure and equity are contained in the 
Financial Performance and Structure section of 
the Strategic Report. Our policies in relation to 
the use of financial instruments and treasury 
operations are set out in the same section under 
the ‘Treasury policies’ heading.

The Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) 
Regulations 2018, effective for years beginning on 
or after 1 January 2019, set out revised 
requirements for reporting on engagement with 
employees, suppliers, customers and others in a 
business relationship with the Company. Our 
approach to stakeholder engagement is set out in 
the Our Stakeholders section of our Strategic 
Report on pages 17 to 18, and summarised on our 
S172 Statement on pages 19 to 20.

Further information in relation to employee 
engagement is set out in the Performance Review 
section of our Strategic Report under the People 
heading on pages 42 to 49. 

EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE 
SHEET DATE

Although the Covid-19 pandemic started before 
the end of the financial year, with lockdown 
restrictions commencing in the UK on 24 March 
2020, the impacts of the pandemic have 
continued since the balance sheet date and up to 
the signing of the financial statements.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
ENERGY AND CARBON REPORTING

We set out our carbon management plan in 2009 
with the aim of reducing our GHG emissions by 
35% by 2020 against a 2008 baseline of 303 
ktonnes. We achieved this target two years early 
in 2018/19 as a result of our investment in 
renewable energy and improved energy 
efficiency, along with lower emissions linked to 
grid electricity. Our approach to reducing energy 
emissions is described in more detail in the 
Performance Review section of our Strategic 
Report under the Environment heading on pages 
34 to 38.

Our total net operational GHG emissions for the 
year ended 31 March 2020 reduced further to 139 
ktonnes CO2e (31 March 2019: 148 ktonnes CO2e), 
which was 54% lower than the 2008 baseline. This 
included 94 ktonnes CO2e resulting from the 
purchase of electricity and 37 ktonnes CO2e 
arising from the use of fuels. A total of 532 million 
kWh of energy was consumed for these purposes.

The protocol that we use for measuring our 
emissions is based on the Carbon Accounting 
Workbook developed and updated annually by the 
consultants Ricardo, on behalf of the water 
industry, and published by UK Water Industry 
Research. This is founded on international and 
Defra protocols but includes additions that are 
specific to the water industry. For the first time 
this year, we have obtained external assurance on 
our emissions reporting to ISO 14064 standard.

Our energy supply deal and power purchase 
agreement with Ørsted provides the company 
with energy from wind farms around the UK and 
is guaranteed to be emissions free. New protocols 
on reporting of emissions from electricity means 
that we can reflect that in our reporting. On this 
basis our emissions in 2019/20 were just 62 
ktonnes CO2e.

In addition to absolute emissions we also monitor 
the emissions intensity of our operations using 
three measures, one relating to the water service 
and two for wastewater. These measures can be 
volatile depending upon levels of rainfall and 
pumping requirements. 

ANNUAL OPERATIONAL GHG 
INTENSITY RATIO

2019/20

2018/19

Emissions/Ml of water

Emissions/Ml of sewage treated 
(flow	to	full	treatment)

144

185

163

208

Emissions/Ml of sewage treated 
(water distribution input)

378

361

Figures in kgCO2e/MI

GOVERNANCE REPORT  101

Having reached our previous target two years 
early, we have now set a new ambitious target for 
the future and have committed to achieving net 
zero emissions by the end of 2027. This will be 
delivered through a combination of further 
investment in renewable energy and green 
vehicles and continued focus on using energy 
more efficiently.

DIRECTORS’ INDEMNIFICATION

The Company has maintained Directors’ and 
Officers’ (D&O) insurance cover throughout the 
year to 31 March 2020, provided under group-wide 
D&O insurance placed by CKHH.

On 21 March 2017 NWGL entered into a deed of 
indemnity to grant the Directors of NWGL and its 
subsidiaries further protection against liability  
to third parties, subject to the conditions set  
out in the Companies Act 2006, and this remains 
in place.

DIRECTORS’ STATEMENT

As required under s418 of the Companies Act 
2006, so far as each current Director is aware, 
there is no relevant audit information of which 
the Company’s auditor is unaware and each 
Director has taken all the steps that he or she 
ought to have taken as a Director in order to make 
himself or herself aware of any relevant audit 
information and to establish that the Company’s 
auditor is aware of that information.

AUDITOR

Pursuant to s487 of the Companies Act 2006, 
Deloitte LLP is deemed to be re-appointed as the 
Company’s auditor for the ensuing year.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
PREPARATION AND GOING CONCERN

The Directors confirm that, in their opinion, the 
Company has sufficient financial resources and 
facilities available to enable it to carry out its 
activities for at least the next 12 months. 
Accordingly, they continue to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing the Annual Report and 
Financial Statements. In arriving at their 
decision, the Directors have taken into account:

 • the financial strength of the Company at the 

balance sheet date and financial performance, 
which is in line with expectations and 
reviewed at each Board meeting, most recently 
in July 2020;

 • the key financial ratios over the next 12 month 
planning horizon, as reflected in investment 
grade credit ratings;

 • the fact that the Company has in place £450m 

of committed bank facilities as back up 
liquidity, maturing in December 2024, which 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
was undrawn at 31 March 2020; and

 • the Company’s formal governance and risk 

management arrangements which are 
monitored by the Audit Committee, R&CSC and 
Board.

The Directors have taken specific account of the 
impacts of the Covid-19 pandemic when making 
this assessment. The Board has received regular 
updates on the operational impacts on the 
business and the business continuity 
arrangements in place to ensure continuity 
provision of service. The Board has also received 
regular assessments of the financial risks arising 
from the pandemic and has noted the impact on 
cash flows from reduced payments from 
household customers and non-household 
business closures.  However, these are not 
material in the context of the £450m liquidity 
arrangements noted above.

VIABILITY STATEMENT

When considering longer-term viability, the 
Directors note that, in their opinion, the PR19 FD 
has resulted in a lower cost of capital, significant 
totex challenge, stretching PC targets and an 
asymmetric penalties and incentives mechanism 
which represents a significant challenge to 
financeability in AMP7. There is also lower 
financial headroom available for management of 
downside shocks and there is likely to be 
pressure on projected credit ratings, as reflected 
in the current negative outlooks, and additional 
financial mitigations required in downside 
scenarios to support long term viability. This 
impact underpins the Board’s decision to appeal 
the FD to the CMA and, while the Board are 
confident in the Company’s case, uncertainty 
around the CMA redetermination has been 
considered in the assessment of financial 
resilience

There is also additional uncertainty on the 
economic impact of the current Covid-19 
pandemic. In addition to the short-term impacts 
of the Covid-19 pandemic being considered in the 
going concern assessment, the Directors note 
that the longer-term impacts remain uncertain 
and work to assess the Company’s financial 
exposure is ongoing. Estimates have been 
included in the scenario analysis to reflect the 
observed impacts to date.

Financial forecasts over longer-term timeframes 
are inherently subject to more risk that the 
assumptions adopted will not be realised. As set 
out above, the Directors have confirmed that the 
business remains a going concern. In considering 
the longer-term viability, the Directors note (1) the 
uncertainties referred to above and that the 
downside stress test scenarios would place 
pressure on projected credit ratings in the next 

GOVERNANCE REPORT  102

five years and (2) the longer-term view beyond 
five years assumes that the 2024 price review will 
provide a sufficient rate of return to enable the 
Company to finance its functions for the period 
2025-30. The Directors have assessed the future 
prospects of the Company and consider that the 
Company should be able to manage its business 
risks, continue to operate and meet its liabilities 
as they fall due over the ten years to March 2030 
given the long-term nature of the business.

In arriving at their conclusion, the Directors have 
taken into account:

•  the Licence which is in place on a rolling 25 

year basis;

•  revenue from wholesale and household retail 
price controls to March 2025 provided by the 
2019 FD by Ofwat, an assumption which is 
subject to revisions by the CMA;

•  the financial strength of the Company at the 
balance sheet date and the fact that the 
Company has a £450m undrawn committed 
bank facility as back up liquidity, maturing in 
December 2024 with the intention of extending 
until 2030 in due course;

•  the key financial ratios over the planning 

horizon of the Company’s financial forecast to 
March 2025 and extended forecast to March 
2030, as reflected in investment grade credit 
ratings;

•  the Board’s flexible dividend policy; and

•  the principal risks and uncertainties facing the 

Company and the mitigating controls, as 
described on pages 57 to 63, which are 
monitored by the Audit Committee, R&CSC 
and Board.

The Directors have chosen a period of ten years 
to March 2030 to assess the viability of the 
Company to align with the business planning 
process for the regulatory price review period to 
March 2025, and the next price review period to 
March 2030. Whilst the Directors do not believe 
that it is possible to test financial resilience 
beyond March 2025 to the same level of robust 
detail, given uncertainty of revenue and returns 
past this point, they have performed an 
assessment of viability beyond five years against 
an extended plan applying reasonable 
assumptions for the next price review which 
includes a sufficient rate of return to enable to 
Company to finance its functions..

The financial forecast has been stress tested 
under a number of plausible and severe adverse 
scenarios. The scenarios were selected by the 
Board after considering the principal risks and 
uncertainties facing the Company, as set out on 
pages 57 to 63 of the Strategic Report, and the key 
economic and financial variables which could 
impact on the forecast. The combined impact of 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
GOVERNANCE REPORT  103

the Company’s investment grade credit rating or 
liquidity position at risk a range of mitigation 
measures would be adopted, including 
application of the Board’s flexible dividend policy. 
While outperformance of the FD allowance would 
also help mitigate such an outcome, the Directors 
do not consider this to be a key mitigating factor 
given the level of challenge and stretch implied 
by the FD.

The Board engaged Deloitte LLP to provide third 
party assurance, in the form of agreed upon 
procedures performed on the calculations and 
stress testing of the plan, to provide independent 
assurance on the impact of the stress testing 
scenarios on the forecast.

FAIR, BALANCED AND 
UNDERSTANDABLE

The Directors consider that the Annual Report 
and Financial Statements, taken as a whole, is 
fair, balanced and understandable and provides 
the information necessary for stakeholders to 
assess the Company’s performance, business 
model and strategy. In reaching this conclusion, 
the Board has taken advice from the Audit 
Committee which has considered the process by 
which the Annual Report and Financial 
Statements has been produced as well as 
reviewing and commenting on the Report.

multiple scenarios has also been tested.

The stress tests were assessed in the context of 
NWL’s overarching financial objective of 
maintaining prudent investment grade credit 
ratings from S&P and Moody’s, and the Board’s 
commitment to retaining regulatory gearing of no 
more than 70%. Whilst the viability statement 
relates specifically to NWL, both rating agencies 
take account of NWGL metrics in their 
methodologies, therefore, the impact on both 
NWL and NWGL financial plans have been 
considered.

The scenarios tested were:

•  lower CPIH inflation, leading to reduced 

allowed revenue and RCV and therefore lower 
profitability and higher gearing;

•  increased future borrowing rates for new and 
refinanced debt, increasing interest charges 
and reducing interest cover metrics;

•  increased defined benefit pension scheme 

deficit and revised schedule of contributions, 
resulting in increased contribution payments 
and higher gearing under rating agency 
methodologies;

•  impact of a credit rating downgrade, causing 
increased borrowing costs and potentially 
triggering refinancing of existing debt and;

•  higher operating and capital investment cost, 
causing increased net debt and gearing and 
reduced profitability;

•  impact of a major incident crystallising one of 
the principal risks identified on pages 57 to 63, 
causing a significant cash outflow and 
increased net debt and gearing; and

•  reduced Outcome Delivery incentive (ODI) 

rewards or increased ODI penalties as a result 
of performance not achieving targeted levels of 
performance, reducing future revenues.

A number of combined scenarios were also 
tested. These were determined by considering 
which scenarios were most likely to occur in 
combination. The combined scenarios tested 
were:

•  adverse economic conditions, comprising 

reduced indexation and increased borrowing 
costs;

•  external impacts, comprising increased 
pension payments and credit rating 
downgrade; and

•  shortfall in operational performance, 

comprising higher totex, major operational 
incident and reduced ODI rewards or increased 
penalties.

To the extent that any of these scenarios, in 
isolation or combination, would place retention of 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
GOVERNANCE REPORT  104

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records which are sufficient 
to show and explain the Company’s transactions 
and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any 
time the financial position of the Company and to 
enable them to ensure that the financial 
statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. 
They are also responsible for safeguarding the 
assets of the Company and hence for taking 
reasonable steps for the prevention and detection 
of fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the corporate and 
financial information on the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the UK governing the preparation 
and dissemination of financial statements may 
differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

By order of the Board 

M Parker, 
Company Secretary, 
15 July 2020

DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES 
STATEMENT

The Directors are responsible for preparing the 
Annual Report and the Financial Statements in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare 
Financial Statements for each financial year. 
Under that law the Directors have elected to 
prepare the Financial Statements in accordance 
with UK Generally Accepted Accounting Practice 
(UK Accounting Standards and applicable law), 
including FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure 
Framework. Under company law the Directors 
must not approve the Financial Statements 
unless they are satisfied that they give a true  
and fair view of the state of affairs of the 
Company and of the profit or loss of the Company 
for that period.

In preparing these Financial Statements, the 
Directors are required to:

 • select suitable accounting policies and then 

apply them consistently;

 • make judgements and accounting estimates 

that are reasonable and prudent;

 • state whether applicable UK Accounting 

Standards have been followed, subject to any 
material departures disclosed and explained in 
the Financial Statements; and

 • prepare the Financial Statements on the  

going concern basis unless it is inappropriate 
to presume that the Company will continue  
in business.

Registered office 
Northumbria House, Abbey Road, Pity Me, Durham, DH1 5FJ

Registered in England and Wales 
Registered no: 02366703

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT  105

FINANCIAL 
STATEMENTS

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
INCOME STATEMENT

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  106

Continuing operations

Revenue

Operating costs

Operating profit

Finance costs

Profit before taxation

Taxation

Profit for the year attributable to the shareholder of the Company

NOTE

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

2

3

6

7(a)

900.4

(541.6)

358.8

(112.4)

246.4

(97.8)

148.6

869.1

(530.3)

338.8

(130.9)

207.9

(39.1)

168.8

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  107

STATEMENT OF 
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

Profit	for	the	year

NOTE

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

148.6

168.8

Items that will not be reclassified subsequently to profit and loss:

Actuarial gain / (loss)

Deferred tax related to actuarial gain / loss

23

7(b)

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit and loss:

(Loss)	/	profit	on	cash	flow	hedges	taken	to	equity

Deferred	tax	on	items	charged	to	equity	that	may	be	reclassified

7(b)

Other comprehensive income / (loss) 

Total comprehensive income for the year attributable to the 
shareholder of the Company

17.0

0.5

(1.0)

0.4

16.9

165.5

(20.6)

3.5

2.1

(0.4)

(15.4)

153.4

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
BALANCE SHEET

AT 31 MARCH 2020 (REGISTERED NUMBER 02366703)

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  108

NOTE

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

Non-current assets

Intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Financial investments

Current assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Short-term cash deposits

Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Borrowings

Provisions

Non-current liabilities

Borrowings

Provisions

Deferred tax liabilities

Pension liability

Hedging instruments

Grants and deferred income

Total liabilities

Net assets

Capital and Reserves

Share capital

Cash	flow	hedge	reserve

Profit	and	loss	account

Equity attributable to the shareholder of the Company

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

17

15

17

7(d)

23

19

18

20

90.6

74.7

4,573.4

4,452.3

160.9

160.9

4,824.9

4,687.9

4.2

244.4

27.0

4.7

280.3

3.6

182.9

5.0

-

191.5

5,105.2

4,879.4

(170.0)

(177.7)

(41.3)

(0.1)

(51.2)

(0.2)

(211.4)

(229.1)

(2,916.0)

(2,824.3)

(0.9)

(467.0)

(84.1)

(44.1)

(506.1)

(0.9)

(409.0)

(108.5)

(42.2)

(490.3)

(4,018.2)

(3,875.2)

(4,229.6)

(4,104.3)

875.6

775.1

122.7

(10.5)

763.4

875.6

122.7

(9.9)

662.3

775.1

Approved by the Board of Directors on 15 July 2020 and signed on their behalf by: H Mottram

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  109

STATEMENT OF  
CHANGES IN EQUITY

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

At 1 April 2018

Profit	for	the	year

Other comprehensive income and expense

Total comprehensive income and 
expense for the year

Dividends

At 31 March 2019

Profit	for	the	year

Other comprehensive income and expense

Total comprehensive income and 
expense for the year

Dividends

At 31 March 2020

NOTE

SHARE 
CAPITAL 
£’m

CASH FLOW 
HEDGE 
RESERVE 
£’m

122.7

(11.6)

-

-

-

-

122.7

-

-

-

-

8

8

-

1.7

1.7

-

(9.9)

-

(0.6)

(0.6)

-

122.7

(10.5)

RETAINED 
EARNINGS 
£’m

TOTAL 
EQUITY 
£’m

640.6

168.8

(17.1)

151.7

751.7

168.8

(15.4)

153.4

(130.0)

(130.0)

662.3

148.6

17.5

166.1

(65.0)

763.4

775.1

148.6

16.9

165.5

(65.0)

875.6

Other comprehensive income and expense taken 
to the cash flow hedge reserve arises from the 
cumulative amount of gains or losses on hedging 
instruments, and associated deferred tax, taken 
directly to equity under the hedge accounting 
provisions of International Accounting Standard 
(IAS) 39.

Other comprehensive income and expense taken 
to retained earnings arises from actuarial 
revaluations, and associated deferred tax, on the 
Company’s defined benefit pension scheme taken 
directly to equity.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
CASH FLOW STATEMENT

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  110

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

Operating activities

Reconciliation of profit before interest to net cash flows from operating activities

Profit	on	ordinary	activities	before	interest

Depreciation and impairment losses

Other non-cash charges and credits

Net credit for provisions, less payments

Difference between pension contributions paid and amounts recognised in the income 
statement

Capital grants received

Increase in inventories

Increase in trade and other receivables

Increase in trade and other payables

Cash generated from operations

Interest paid

Income taxes paid

Net cash flows from operating activities

Investing activities

Interest received

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Short term cash deposits

Purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets

Net cash flows from investing activities

Financing activities

New borrowings

Dividends paid to equity shareholders

Repayment of borrowings

Payment of principal in respect of leases

Net cash flows from financing activities

Increase / (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at start of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Short term cash deposits

Total cash, cash equivalents and short term cash deposits

Additional cash flow information is included in note 21.

358.8

143.3

(13.6)

(0.1)

(9.6)

14.9

(0.6)

(50.1)

1.2

444.2

(96.9)

(61.0)

286.3

3.3

1.1

(22.0)

(247.6)

(265.2)

99.4

(65.0)

(46.0)

(4.3)

(15.9)

5.2

(0.5)

4.7

4.7

27.0

31.7

338.8

137.9

(15.1)

(0.2)

(8.8)

11.6

(0.5)

(22.1)

14.2

455.8

(97.5)

(39.2)

319.1

3.3

3.3

87.0

(254.5)

(160.9)

10.0

(130.0)

(37.5)

(3.4)

(160.9)

(2.7)

2.2

(0.5)

(0.5)

5.0

4.5

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  111

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL 
STATEMENTS

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES

NWL is incorporated in the UK under the 
Companies Act 2006.  The Company is a private 
company limited by shares and is registered in 
England and Wales.  The address of the 
Company’s registered office is shown on page 
104. The nature of the Company’s operations and 
its principal activities are set out in the Strategic 
Report on page 10.

These Financial Statements are presented in 
pounds sterling and all values are rounded to the 
nearest one hundred thousand pounds (£0.1m) 
except where otherwise indicated.

These Financial Statements are separate 
financial statements. The Company is exempt 
from the preparation and delivery of consolidated 
financial statements under the terms of section 
400 of the Companies Act 2006, because it is 
included in the Group Financial Statements of 
NWGL (see note 25).

(A) BASIS OF ACCOUNTING

These Financial Statements have been prepared 
in accordance with FRS 101, incorporating the 
Amendments to FRS 101 issued by the FRC in 
July 2015 and the amendments to Company law 
made by The Companies, Partnerships and 
Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2015.

The Company adopted the new accounting 
standard IFRS 16 Leases in the period. The 
amended accounting policy is explained below in 
note 1(g) Leases. The approach adopted to 
transition to the new standard, and the impact on 
the Financial Statements, is described in note 1(r).

As permitted by FRS 101, the Company has taken 
advantage of the disclosure exemptions available 
under that standard in relation to financial 
instruments, standards not yet effective and 
related party transactions.

The Financial Statements have been prepared 
under the historical cost convention, with the 
exception of financial instruments held at fair 
value through profit and loss.

The Financial Statements have been prepared on 
a going concern basis, having considered the 
principal risks and uncertainties, which assumes 
that the Company will have adequate funding to 
meet its liabilities as they fall due in the 
foreseeable future. As at 31 March 2020, the 
Company had net current assets of £68.9m (2019: 
net current liabilities of £37.6m). The Directors 
have reviewed cash flow requirements and other 
factors, as described in the going concern 
statement on pages 101 and 102 of the Directors’ 
Report. Accordingly, the Directors believe it is 
appropriate to prepare the financial statements 
on a going concern basis.

(B) REVENUE

Revenue, which excludes Value Added Tax, 
represents the income receivable in the ordinary 
course of business for services provided within 
the UK. In accordance with IFRS 15 Revenue from 
Contracts with Customers revenue is recognised 
as performance obligations to the customer are 
satisfied.

The Company’s principal source of revenue is 
from water and wastewater charges to customers, 
which are recognised over the period which the 
services are provided. For volumetric charges to 
measured customers, revenue is recognised as 
the service is supplied. For measured charges 
which have not yet been billed, an accrual is 
made based on an estimate of consumption. 
Wholesale charges for non-household customers 
are estimated on the basis of market information 
provided by MOSL.

A secondary source of revenue is contributions to 
capital investment, particularly from developers.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  112

Where assets are constructed by a developer and 
adopted by NWL at no cost to the Company, the 
assets are recognised in the balance sheet at 
their fair value on the date of the transfer and an 
equivalent value is recognised in deferred 
income, in accordance with IFRIC 18 Transfers of 
Assets from Customers. The fair value is based on 
the average cost to the Company of constructing 
an equivalent asset.

Upon their initial recognition, right-of-use assets 
are valued at the initial measurement of the 
corresponding lease liability (note 1(g)), less lease 
payments made at or before the commencement 
day, any lease incentives received and any initial 
direct costs. They are subsequently measured at 
cost less accumulated depreciation and 
impairment losses. Right-of-use assets are 
presented as a separate line in Note 10.

Freehold land is not depreciated. Other assets are 
depreciated evenly over their estimated 
economic lives, which are principally as follows:

Freehold buildings 

Operational structures, plant 
and machinery

30-60 years

4-92 years

Infrastructure assets (see below) 

4-200 years

Fixtures, fittings, tools 
and equipment

4-25 years

The carrying values of property, plant and 
equipment are reviewed for impairment if events 
or changes in circumstances indicate the 
carrying value may not be recoverable and are 
written down immediately to their recoverable 
amount. Useful lives and residual values are 
reviewed annually and, where adjustments are 
required, these are made prospectively.

Right-of-use assets are depreciated over the 
shorter period of lease term and useful life of the 
underlying asset. The depreciation starts at the 
commencement date of the lease.

Assets in the course of construction are not 
depreciated until commissioned.

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

For contributions related to the connection of 
new properties to the Company’s networks, 
comprising infrastructure charges, new 
connection charges, requisitioned mains and 
sewers and adopted assets, the Company 
considers that these activities form a combined 
performance obligation that is not distinct from 
the ongoing provision of water and wastewater 
services through the new connection. On this 
basis, these contributions are recognised as 
deferred income and amortised to the income 
statement over the expected useful life of the 
connection, per note 1(f).

For other contributions to capital investment, 
most significantly mains and sewer diversions, 
the Company considers that the performance 
obligation is satisfied upon completion of the 
investment, which will typically be the point at 
which the associated asset is brought into use. 
On this basis, these contributions are recognised 
in full in the income statement upon satisfaction 
of the performance obligation. Contributions 
received before the performance obligation is 
satisfied are recorded as receipts in advance.

(C) INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Intangible assets, primarily comprising computer 
software, are recognised at cost less accumulated 
amortisation and any provision for impairment. 
Computer software is amortised evenly over its 
estimated economic life of 2 to 25 years. 
Intangible assets in development are not 
amortised until commissioned. Amortisation is 
charged to the income statement through 
operating costs.

(D) PROPERTY, PLANT 
AND EQUIPMENT

Property, plant and equipment, including assets 
in the course of construction, comprise 
infrastructure assets (being mains and sewers, 
impounding and pumped raw water storage 
reservoirs, dams, sludge pipelines and sea 
outfalls) and other assets (including properties, 
vehicles and above ground plant and equipment).

Purchased property, plant and equipment are 
included at cost less accumulated depreciation 
and any provision for impairment. Cost 
comprises the aggregate amount incurred and 
the fair value of any other consideration given to 
acquire the asset and includes costs directly 
attributable to making the asset capable of 
operating as intended. 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  113

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Infrastructure assets
Infrastructure assets comprise a network of 
systems being mains and sewers, reservoirs, 
dams and sea outfalls.

Expenditure on infrastructure assets which 
enhances the asset base is treated as fixed asset 
additions while maintenance expenditure which 
does not enhance the asset base is charged as an 
operating cost.

Infrastructure assets are depreciated evenly to 
their estimated residual values over their 
estimated economic lives, which are principally 
as follows:

Dams and impounding reservoirs 

150 years

Water mains 

Sea outfalls 

Sewers  

Dedicated pipelines 

100 years

60 years

200 years

4-20 years

(E) FINANCIAL INVESTMENTS

Financial investments are stated at their 
purchase cost, less provision for diminution in 
value (note 11).

(F) GRANTS AND CONTRIBUTIONS

Grants are recognised at their fair value where 
there is reasonable assurance that the grant will 
be received and all attaching conditions will be 
complied with. Revenue grants are credited to the 
income statement in the period to which they 
relate.  

Grants and contributions related to the 
connection of new properties to the Company’s 
networks, comprising infrastructure charges, new 
connection charges, requisitioned mains and 
sewers and adopted assets, are recognised as 
deferred income and amortised to the income 
statement over the expected useful life of the 
connection, as explained in note 1(b).

Other grants and contributions to capital 
investment, most significantly mains and sewer 
diversions, are recognised in full in the income 
statement upon satisfaction of the performance 
obligation to the customer, which is the point at 
which the associated asset is brought into use. Up 
to this point, any contributions received are 
reported as receipts in advance.

(G) LEASES

The Company has adopted IFRS 16 with effect 
from 1 April 2019 (note 1(r)).

The Company assesses whether a contract is or 
contains a lease, at the inception of a new 
contract and recognises a right-of-use asset and 
a corresponding lease liability with respect to all 
lease arrangements in which it is the lessee, 
except for short-term leases (defined as leases 
with a lease term of 12 months or less). For these 
leases, the Company recognises the lease 
payments as an operating expense on a straight-
line basis over the term of the lease. 

The lease liability is initially measured at the 
present value of the lease payments that are not 
paid at the commencement date, discounted by 
using the rate implicit in the lease. If this rate 
cannot be readily determined, the lessee uses its 
incremental borrowing rate.

Lease payments included in the measurement of 
the lease liability comprise:

•  fixed lease payments (including in substance 
fixed payments), less any lease incentives 
receivable;

•  variable lease payments that depend on an 
index or rate, initially measured using the 
index or rate at the commencement date;

•  the amount expected to be payable by the 
lessee under residual value guarantees;

•  the exercise price of purchase options, if the 
lessee is reasonably certain to exercise the 
options; and

•  payments of penalties for terminating the 

lease, if the lease term reflects the exercise of 
an option to terminate the lease.

The lease liability is presented within Borrowings 
in the Balance sheet and as a separate line within 
note 15.

The lease liability is subsequently measured by 
increasing the carrying amount to reflect interest 
on the lease liability (using the effective interest 
method) and by reducing the carrying amount to 
reflect the lease payments made.

The Company remeasures the lease liability (and 
makes a corresponding adjustment to the related 
right-of-use asset) whenever:

•  the lease term has changed or there is a 

significant event or change in circumstances 
resulting in a change in the assessment of 
exercise of a purchase option, in which case 
the lease liability is remeasured by discounting 
the revised lease payments using a revised 
discount rate;

•  the lease payments change due to changes in 

an index or rate or a change in expected 
payment under a guaranteed residual value, in 
which cases the lease liability is remeasured 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

by discounting the revised lease payments 
using an unchanged discount rate (unless the 
lease payments change is due to a change in a 
floating interest rate, in which case a revised 
discount rate is used); or

•  a lease contract is modified and the lease 

modification is not accounted for as a separate 
lease, in which case the lease liability is 
remeasured based on the lease term of the 
modified lease by discounting the revised lease 
payments using a revised discount rate at the 
effective date of the modification.

The Company did not make any such 
adjustments during the periods presented.

Variable rents that do not depend on an index or 
rate are not included in the measurement of the 
lease liability and the right-of-use asset. The 
related payments are recognised as an expense 
in the period in which the event or condition that 
triggers those payments occurs and are included 
in operating costs in the Income Statement.

(H) INVENTORIES

Inventories are stated at cost less any provision 
necessary to recognise damage and 
obsolescence. Inventory is charged at average 
cost upon use.

(I) PENSION COSTS

The Company is the principal employer of the 
NWPS, which has both a defined benefit section 
and a defined contribution section.  

The cost of providing benefits under the defined 
benefit section of the Scheme is determined 
using the projected unit credit method, which 
attributes entitlement to benefits to the current 
period (to determine current service cost) and to 
the current and prior periods (to determine the 
present value of defined benefit obligation) and is 
based on actuarial advice. Past service costs are 
recognised in the income statement on a straight 
line basis over the vesting period or immediately 
if the benefits have vested. When a settlement 
(eliminating all obligations for benefits already 
accrued) or a curtailment (reducing future 
obligations as a result of a material reduction in 
the scheme membership or a reduction in future 
entitlement) occurs, the obligation and related 
plan assets are re-measured using current 
actuarial assumptions and the resultant gain or 
loss recognised in the income statement during 
the period in which the settlement or curtailment 
occurs. Net interest is calculated by applying the 
discount rate to the net defined asset or liability.  

The service cost is disclosed in manpower costs 
and the net interest expense is disclosed within 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  114

finance costs.

Actuarial gains and losses on experience 
adjustments and changes in actuarial 
assumptions are recognised in full in the period 
in which they occur in the statement of 
comprehensive income.

The costs of the defined contribution section are 
charged to the income statement in the period 
they arise.

(J) TAXATION

Current tax
Current tax liabilities are measured at the amount 
expected to be paid to the taxation authorities. 
The tax rates and tax laws used to compute the 
amounts are those that are enacted or 
substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax
Deferred tax is provided using the liability 
method on temporary differences at the balance 
sheet date between the tax bases of assets and 
liabilities and their carrying amounts for 
financial reporting purposes.

Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for all 
taxable temporary differences except:

•  where the deferred tax liability arises from the 
initial recognition of goodwill or of an asset or 
liability in a transaction that is not a business 
combination and, at the time of the transaction, 
affects neither the accounting profit nor 
taxable profit or loss; and

•  in respect of taxable temporary differences 
associated with investments in subsidiaries 
where the timing of the reversal of the 
temporary differences can be controlled and it 
is probable that the temporary differences will 
not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Deferred tax assets are recognised for all 
deductible temporary differences and unused tax 
losses to the extent that it is probable that taxable 
profit will be available against which the 
deductible temporary differences and unused tax 
losses can be utilised except:

•  where the deferred tax asset relating to the 

deductible temporary difference arises from 
the initial recognition of an asset or liability in 
a transaction that is not a business 
combination and, at the time of the transaction, 
affects neither the accounting profit nor 
taxable profit or loss; and

•  in respect of deductible temporary differences 
associated with investments in subsidiaries 
where the timing of the reversal of the 
temporary differences can be controlled and it 
is probable that the temporary differences will 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

reverse in the foreseeable future and taxable 
profit will be available against which the 
temporary differences can be utilised.The 
carrying amount of deferred tax assets is 
reviewed at each balance sheet date and 
reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that sufficient taxable profit will be 
available to allow all or part of the deferred tax 
asset to be utilised. Unrecognised deferred tax 
assets are reassessed at each balance sheet 
date and are recognised to the extent that it 
has become probable that future taxable profit 
will allow the deferred tax asset to be 
recovered.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at 
the tax rates that are expected to apply to the 
period when the asset is realised or the liability is 
settled, based on tax rates (and tax laws) that 
have been enacted, or substantively enacted, at 
the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax is recognised in the income 
statement, except when it relates to items that 
are recognised in other comprehensive income or 
directly in equity, in which case the deferred tax 
is also recognised in other comprehensive 
income or directly in equity.

(K) FOREIGN CURRENCY

All transactions denominated in foreign 
currencies are translated into sterling at the 
actual rates of exchange ruling at the date of 
transaction. Foreign currency balances are 
translated into sterling at the rates of exchange 
ruling at the balance sheet date. Exchange gains 
or losses are recognised in the profit and loss 
account in the period incurred.

(L) RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT

Research and development expenditure is 
charged to the income statement in the period in 
which it is incurred.

(M) DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL 
INSTRUMENTS

The Company utilises interest and inflation rate 
swaps, gilt locks and forward exchange contracts 
as derivative financial instruments.

A derivative instrument is considered to be used 
for hedging purposes when it alters the risk 
profile of an underlying exposure of the Company 
in line with the Group’s risk management 
policies. Derivative financial instruments are 
stated at their fair value.

Hedge accounting is employed in respect of those 
derivative financial instruments fulfilling the 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  115

requirements for hedge accounting as prescribed 
under IFRS 9.  The Company has not applied 
hedge accounting criteria under IFRS 9 on a 
retrospective basis.  Existing derivative financial 
instruments, if eligible for hedge accounting, 
continue to apply the hedging criteria under the 
provisions of IAS 39.  Any new instruments will 
apply IFRS 9.

Derivative financial instruments are measured at 
fair value, which is considered to be the price that 
would be received to sell an asset or paid to 
transfer a liability in an orderly transaction 
reflecting the credit risk of the counterparties in 
the principal (or most advantageous) market 
under market conditions as at the balance sheet 
date.

The fair value of forward exchange contracts is 
calculated by reference to current forward 
exchange rates for contracts with similar 
maturity profiles. The fair value of interest rate 
swaps and inflation swaps are determined by 
reference to market values for similar 
instruments. 

Hedging transactions undertaken by the 
Company are classified as either fair value 
hedges when they hedge the exposure to changes 
in the fair value of a recognised asset or liability, 
or cash flow hedges where they hedge exposure 
to variability in currency cash flows that is either 
attributable to a particular risk associated with a 
recognised asset or liability or a forecast 
transaction.

In relation to fair value hedges which meet the 
conditions for hedge accounting, any gain or loss 
from re-measuring the hedging instrument at fair 
value is recognised immediately in the income 
statement.

In relation to cash flow hedges to hedge firm 
currency commitments which meet the 
conditions for hedge accounting, the portion of 
the gain or loss on the hedging instrument that is 
determined to be an effective hedge is recognised 
directly in the cash flow hedge reserve and the 
ineffective portion is recognised in the income 
statement.

When the hedged firm commitment results in the 
recognition of a non-financial asset or a non-
financial liability then, at the time the asset or 
liability is recognised, the associated gains or 
losses that had previously been recognised in the 
cash flow hedge reserve are included in the initial 
measurement of the acquisition cost or other 
carrying amount of the asset or liability. For all 
other cash flow hedges, the gains or losses that 
are recognised in the cash flow hedge reserve are 
transferred to the income statement in the same 
periods in which the hedged firm commitment 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  116

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

affects the income statement.

(P) BORROWING COSTS

For derivatives that do not qualify for hedge 
accounting, any gains or losses arising from 
changes in fair value are taken directly to the 
income statement.

Hedge accounting is discontinued when the 
hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated 
or exercised, or no longer qualifies for hedge 
accounting. At that point in time, any cumulative 
gain or loss on the hedging instrument 
recognised in the cash flow hedge reserve is kept 
in the cash flow hedge reserve until the forecast 
transaction occurs. If a hedged transaction is no 
longer expected to occur, the net cumulative gain 
or loss recognised in the cash flow hedge reserve 
is transferred to the income statement.

Borrowing costs are generally expensed as 
incurred. Borrowing costs that are directly 
attributable to the acquisition or construction of 
an asset that necessarily takes a substantial time 
to prepare for its intended use are capitalised 
while the asset is being constructed as part of the 
cost of that asset.

Capitalisation ceases when the asset is 
substantially ready for its intended use or sale. If 
active development is interrupted for an 
extended period, capitalisation is suspended. 
When construction occurs piecemeal, and use of 
each part ceases upon substantial completion of 
that part, a weighted average cost of borrowings 
is used.

(N) INTEREST BEARING LOANS AND 
BORROWINGS

All loans and borrowings are initially stated at 
the amount of the net proceeds, being fair value 
of the consideration received net of issue costs 
associated with the borrowing. Finance costs 
(including issue costs) are taken to the income 
statement over the term of the debt at a constant 
rate on the balance sheet carrying amount. The 
carrying amount is increased by the finance 
charges amortised and reduced by payments 
made in respect of the accounting period. The 
carrying amount of index linked borrowings 
increases annually in line with the relevant RPI, 
with the accretion being charged to the income 
statement as finance costs payable. Other 
borrowing costs are recognised as an expense 
when incurred.

Realised gains and losses that occur from the 
early termination of loans and borrowings are 
taken to the income statement in that period.

Net debt is the sum of all loans and borrowings 
less cash and cash equivalents, short- term cash 
deposits, financial investments and loans 
receivable.

(0) BAD DEBT PROVISIONING

The bad debt provision is calculated by applying a 
range of percentages to debt of different ages. 
These percentages also vary between different 
categories of debt.  Higher percentages are 
applied to those categories of debt which are 
considered to be of greater risk and also to debt of 
greater age. 

(Q) SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING 
JUDGEMENTS AND KEY SOURCES OF 
ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY

In the process of applying the accounting 
policies, the Company is required to make certain 
judgements, estimates and assumptions that it 
believes are reasonable based on the information 
available. Actual results may have a significant 
risk of causing a material adjustment to the 
carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within 
the next financial year.

The significant accounting judgements were:

 • the estimation of income for measured water 
and sewerage services supplied but not billed 
at the end of the financial period. Consumption 
by measured domestic customers is billed in 
arrears on quarterly or six-monthly cycles. 
Revenue is estimated and accrued using a 
defined methodology based upon historical 
usage and the relevant tariff per customer. 
Consumption by non-household properties is 
billed to the relevant retailer under the terms of 
the Wholesale Contract and may be either in 
advance or in arrears. Revenue billed in arrears 
is estimated by reference to wholesale market 
settlement reports, adjusted for any additional 
information obtained after a settlement report 
has been run;

 • the estimation of uncertain tax provisions, 

which are assessed on advice from 
independent tax advisers and the status of 
ongoing discussions with the relevant tax 
authorities; and

 • the asset lives assigned to property, plant and 
equipment, details of which can be found in 
note 1(d) above. 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  117

The significant accounting estimates were:

 • those assumptions used in arriving at the 

defined benefit pension scheme assets and 
liabilities under IAS 19. These key assumptions 
and their possible impact are disclosed in note 
23; and

 • the bad debt provision, which is determined by 
estimating expected credit losses based on the 
Company’s historical experience of 
irrecoverable debts. Debt is segmented 
according to the age of the debt, payment 
history and type of debt (eg. current or previous 
occupier). Higher provisioning percentages are 
applied to categories of debt which are 
considered to be of greater risk, including those 
with a poor payment history as well as to those 
of greater age. Bad debt provisioning rates are 
reviewed annually to reflect the latest 
collection performance data from the 
Company’s billing system. Potential impacts of 
forward-looking macro-economic factors on 
collectability are also considered. A reduction 
of 0.1% in the long term collection rate would 
increase the provision by £5.9m.

Consider forward looking macro-economic 
factors and conclude on appropriate loss rates

The Company’s detailed bad and doubtful debts 
provision policy has remained unchanged during 
the year and has been consistently applied in the 
current and prior periods. The bad debt provision 
is charged to operating costs to reflect the 
Company’s assessment of the risk of non 
recoverability of debtors. It is calculated by 

applying expected recovery rates to debts 
outstanding at the end of the accounting period. 
These recovery rates take into account the age of 
the debt, payment history and type of debt.

Higher provisioning percentages are applied to 
categories of debt which are considered to be of 
greater risk, including those with a poor payment 
history as well as to those of greater age. Bad debt 
provisioning rates are reviewed annually to 
reflect the latest collection performance data 
from the Company’s billing system. Actual 
amounts recovered may differ from the estimated 
levels of recovery which could impact on 
operating results.

A comparison of the provision against historical 
collection rates is carried out at the end of each 
year. This indicated a slight deterioration in the 
longer term recovery of debt. In addition, an 
assessment has been made of the potential 
impact of Covid-19 on the economic 
circumstances of our household customers, in 
relation to outstanding debt at the balance sheet 
date. This assessment was based on cash flow 
trends observed after the balance sheet date and 
third party modelling of the potential economic 
impacts of Covid-19. Based on this assessment, an 
additional provision of £6.5m has been made.

Accordingly, the provision has increased from 
£85.6m at 31 March 2019 to £104.4m at 31 March 
2020. As well as the additional Covid-19 provision 
and adjustment for historical collection rates, this 
reflects aging of outstanding debt less debt 
written off.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  118

Former finance leases
For leases that were classified as finance leases 
under IAS 17, the carrying amount of the leased 
assets and obligations under finance leases 
measured applying IAS 17 immediately before the 
date of initial application has been reclassified to 
right of use assets and lease liabilities 
respectively without any adjustment.

Impact of initial application of IFRS 16
The weighted average incremental borrowing rate 
applied to lease liabilities recognised in the 
Balance Sheet on 1 April 2019 is 2.6%.

The table below shows the operating lease 
commitments disclosed under IAS 17 as at 31 
March 2019 discounted using the incremental 
borrowing rate at the date of initial application 
and the lease liabilities recognised in the Balance 
Sheet on 1 April 2019:

Operating lease commitment at 
31 March 2019

Effect of discounting the above amount

Lease liabilities recognised at 1 April 2019

£’m

12.6

(9.0)

3.6

The Company has recognised £3.6m as right of 
use assets in respect of former operating leases.

(R) TRANSITION TO NEW ACCOUNTING 
STANDARDS IN THE PERIOD

IFRS 16 Leasing
The Company adopted IFRS 16 with effect from 1 
April 2019 and has applied the standard 
retrospectively with the cumulative effect 
recognised at the date of initial application. Prior 
years have not been restated.

The Company has made use of the practical 
expedient available on transition to IFRS 16 not to 
reassess whether or not a contract is or contains 
a lease. Accordingly the definition of a lease 
under IAS 17 will continue to be applied to those 
leases entered into before 1 April 2019.

The Company has applied the definition of a lease 
as set out in IFRS 16 to all lease contracts entered 
into or changed on or after 1 April 2019.

Former operating leases
IFRS 16 has changed how NWL accounts for 
leases previously classified as operating leases 
under IAS 17. In applying IFRS 16 to these leases, 
NWL has:

•  recognised right of use assets and lease 
liabilities in the Balance Sheet, initially 
measured at the present value of future lease 
payments, with the right of use asset adjusted 
by any prepayments or accruals in accordance 
with IFRS 16:C8(b)(ii); and

•  recognised depreciation of right of use assets 
and interest of lease liabilities in the Income 
Statement.

The Company has used the following practical 
expedients when applying the cumulative catch 
up approach to former operating leases:

•  applied a single discount rate to portfolios of 

leases with reasonable similar characteristics; 
and

•  elected not to recognise right of use assets and 
lease liabilities to leases for which the lease 
term ends within 12 months of the date of 
initial application.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  119

2. REVENUE AND SEGMENTAL INFORMATION

The Directors consider that the Company has a single class of business, the provision of water and 
wastewater services. All revenue is generated from within the United Kingdom.

Appointed business revenue is generated from the regulated activities of the Company, defined in its 
licence of appointment, necessary to fulfil its duties as a water and sewerage undertaker under the 
Water Industry Act of 1991.

Non-appointed revenue is generated from the non-regulated activities of the Company.

Household 
£’m

Non Household 
£’m

Total  
£’m

Household 
£’m

Non Household 
£’m 

2020

Wholesale Water

Wholesale Wastewater

Retail

Other appointed business

Total appointed business

Non appointed business

Total revenue

346.8

246.4

59.8

653.0

95.43

442.1

78.1

324.5

-

59.8

173.4

826.4

339.4

237.5

59.6

636.5

30.9

857.3

43.1

900.4

2019

Total  
£’m

436.6

316.7

97.2

79.2

-

59.6

176.4

812.9

31.2

844.1

25.0

869.1

3. OPERATING COSTS

Materials and consumables

Manpower costs (note 5)

Own work capitalised

Costs of research and development

Operating lease payments

Bad debt charge

Inventories recognised as an expense

Other operating costs

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Amortisation of intangible assets

Profit	on	disposal	of	property,	plant	and	equipment

Total operating costs

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

21.0

150.1

(43.7)

0.8

-

21.7

2.8

246.6

134.0

9.3

(1.0)

541.6

19.9

144.7

(41.0)

0.9

2.4

12.4

3.4

252.5

129.7

8.2

(2.8)

530.3

Auditor’s remuneration in respect of the statutory audit of the Financial Statements initially accrued 
amounted to £154k (2019: £219k), including fees for a financing subsidiary, NWF, of £7k (2019: £6k). The 
prior year costs included fees related to the implementation of new accounting standards and a new 
customer billing system. Fees of £78k (2019: £61k) were incurred in respect of the APR, including the 
audit of the Regulatory Accounting Statements, and agreed upon procedures in respect of additional 
regulatory information, the statement of sufficiency of financial resources and facilities and financial 
resilience stress testing.

Fees of £14k (2019: £158k) were incurred for non-audit services comprising provision of assurance on 
third party contracts. The prior year costs included work in respect of PR19 submissions and some 
consultancy support.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  120

(b) Highest paid Director 
The amounts for remuneration shown in note 
4(a) include the following in respect of the 
highest paid Director:

Emoluments	(including	benefits	
in kind)

2020 
£’000

2019 
£’000

583

651

The highest paid Director left the defined 
contribution section of the NWPS at the 
beginning of the year ended 31 March 2017, 
therefore no payments were made to the Scheme 
in either the current or prior year.

4. DIRECTORS’ EMOLUMENTS

(a) Directors’ remuneration
The remuneration of the Directors of the 
Company was as follows:

Emoluments  
(including	benefits	in	kind)

2020 
£’000

2019 
£’000

1,482

1,565

For those Directors holding office with both NWL 
and NWGL, or contributing significantly to the 
day to day operations of NWGL, costs are 
apportioned between the companies to reflect the 
level of activity carried out for each company. 
This note reflects only the proportion of costs 
charged to NWL.

One of the Directors was a member of a defined 
benefit section of the Scheme, where the 
Company makes contributions towards the cost, 
during the year but stopped being an active 
member before the year end (2019: 1). 

One of the Directors at 31 March 2020 was a 
member of a defined contribution section of the 
Scheme where the Company makes contributions 
towards the cost (2019: 1).

The Directors’ remuneration policy and a detailed 
report showing total remuneration for each 
Director, for the year to 31 March 2020, are set out 
in the Remuneration Committee Report on pages 
88 to 99 of the Governance Report.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  121

5. EMPLOYEE INFORMATION

The total employment costs of all employees (including Directors) were as follows:

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

Gross costs charged to the profit and loss account:

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Other pensions costs

Costs recharged to other Group companies:

Wages and salaries

Net costs charged to the profit and loss account:

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Other pensions costs

Costs charged to capital schemes:

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Other pensions costs

82.9

9.1

20.2

112.2

2.3

2.3

80.6

9.1

20.2

109.9

30.3

3.2

6.7

40.2

81.9

8.9

18.7

109.5

2.3

2.3

79.6

8.9

18.7

107.2

28.4

3.1

6.0

37.5

Total employee costs

150.1

144.7

The average monthly number of employees during the year was made up as follows:

Water and waste water services

Customer services and meter reading

Other regulated activities

Non regulated activities

2020

1,295

643

1,081

89

3,108

2019

1,561

569

927

89

3,146

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
6. NET FINANCE COSTS

Finance costs payable:

Bank overdrafts and loans

Receivable in respect of derivatives

Payable to subsidiary Group company

Payable to other Group company

Amortisation	of	discount,	fees,	loan	issue	costs	and	other	financing	items

Accretion on index linked bonds

Interest cost on pension plan obligations

Obligations under leases

Less amounts capitalised on qualifying assets

Fair	value	losses	on	derivative	financial	instruments

Total finance costs payable

Finance income receivable:

Bank deposits

Receivable from Group companies

Total finance costs receivable

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  122

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

11.3

(4.5)

85.7

0.1

2.1

25.9

2.3

2.6

125.5

(10.6)

114.9

0.7

115.6

(0.2)

(3.0)

(3.2)

13.0

(4.9)

85.2

-

2.3

30.2

2.2

3.1

131.1

(8.5)

122.6

11.5

134.1

(0.3)

(2.9)

(3.2)

Net finance costs payable

112.4

130.9

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
7. TAXATION

(a) Tax on profit on ordinary activities

Current tax:

UK current income tax charge at 19% (2019: 19%)

Adjustments in respect of prior periods

Payable in respect of group relief for the year

Adjustments in respect of prior period group relief

Total current tax

Deferred tax:

Origination and reversal of temporary differences in the year at 19% 
(2019: 19%)

Impact of increase in rate of UK corporation tax

Adjustments in respect of prior periods

Total deferred tax

Tax charge in the income statement

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  123

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

26.7

(7.5)

15.2

4.5

38.9

4.7

51.9

2.3

58.9

97.8

18.4

(4.1)

16.5

2.8

33.6

4.5

-

1.0

5.5

39.1

The rate of UK corporation tax for the current year was 19%. The reduction to 17% with effect from 1 
April 2020 included in Finance Act 2016 has been cancelled. Accordingly, deferred tax has been 
restated from 17% to 19% and all movements have been calculated at the higher rate.

Tax losses have been provisionally claimed as group relief from other group companies in the current 
year, for which payment is being made at the full rate of tax.

Net prior year adjustments mainly reflect a revision to the estimate for corporate interest restrictions 
and the benefit of improved capital allowances claims (including R&D).

(b) Tax relating to items charged outside the income statement

Deferred tax:

Actuarial gains / (losses) on pension scheme

Impact of increase in rate of UK corporation tax

Financial instruments

Impact of increase in rate of UK corporation tax

Tax credit in the statement of comprehensive income

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

3.2

(3.7)

(0.2)

(0.2)

(0.9)

(3.5)

-

0.4

-

(3.1)

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  124

7. TAXATION (continued)

(c) Reconciliation of the tax charge

Profit on ordinary activities before tax

Profit	on	ordinary	activities	multiplied	by	standard	rate	of	corporation	tax	of	19%	(2019:	19%)

Effects of:

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes

Non-taxable gains and amortisation of capital sums

Depreciation in respect of non-qualifying items

Impact on deferred tax of change in current tax rate

Deferred tax movement not at current tax rate for the year

Adjustments in respect of prior periods

Transfer pricing adjustments

Balancing payment payable

Total tax charge

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

246.4

46.8

207.9

39.5

0.2

(1.5)

1.2

51.9

-

(0.8)

(0.8)

0.8

97.8

1.1

(1.9)

1.2

-

(0.5)

(0.3)

(0.8)

0.8

39.1

The effective rate of tax for the year was 39.7% (2019: 18.8%). The increase of 20.9% is mainly explained 
by the restatement of deferred tax from 17% to 19%.

(d) Deferred tax

ACCELERATED 

RETIREMENT 

FAIR VALUE 

TAX 

DEFERRED 

BENEFIT 

HEDGING 

BUSINESS 

DEPRECIATION 

INCOME 

OBLIGATIONS 

INSTRUMENTS 

COMBINATIONS 

OTHER 

TOTAL 

At 1 April 2018

462.2

(57.3)

£’m

£’m

Adoption of IFRS 15

-

12.0

£’m

(17.3)

-

2.2

£’m

(5.5)

-

£’m

5.4

-

£’m

7.1

£’m

394.6

-

12.0

(2.1)

(0.1)

1.2

5.5

7.1

(2.8)

-

-

(3.5)

At 31 March 2019

469.3

(48.1)

(18.6)

64.6

(9.6)

2.9

0.4

(7.2)

(0.7)

-

-

(3.1)

5.3

0.5

8.3

409.0

1.2

58.9

Charge/(credit) in the 
income statement

Charge/(credit) in 
other comprehensive 
income

Charge/(credit) in the 
income statement

Credit in other 
comprehensive 
income

-

-

(0.5)

(0.4)

-

-

(0.9)

At 31 March 2020

533.9

(57.7)

(16.2)

(8.3)

5.8

9.5

467.0

(e) Factors that may affect future tax charges

The Company expects to continue to incur high levels of capital expenditure during the 2020-25 
regulatory review period which, under current tax legislation, should result in claims for tax reliefs in 
excess of depreciation.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
8. DIVIDENDS

Equity:

Dividends paid:

Final dividend paid for the year ended 31 March 2019 of 
53.00p (year ended 31 March 2018: 53.00p) per share on an 
aggregated basis

Interim dividend paid for the year ended 31 March 2020 
of nil (year ended 31 March 2019: 53.00p) per share on an 
aggregated basis

Total dividends paid in the year

Dividends proposed:

Final dividend proposed for the year ended 31 March 2020 
of nil (year ended 31 March 2019: 53.00p) per share on an 
aggregated basis

Total dividends proposed

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  125

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

65.0

-

65.0

-

-

65.0

65.0

130.0

65.0

65.0

Dividend Policy

Application of Policy

The Board has a policy which takes into account 
the principle of incentive based price cap 
regulation, including operating and investment 
performance. When declaring dividends, the 
Directors consider the Company’s five-year plan 
and give due consideration to business 
performance, the prospects of the Company and 
the principal risks facing the business.

Specifically, the Board determines the level of 
dividend declared by reference to:

 • the Company’s ability to finance its functions; 

 • the Company’s cumulative financial 

performance and past outperformance; and 

 • maintaining the Company’s investment grade 

credit ratings. 

The Directors also have regard to: 

 • the Company’s operational performance and 
the level of service provided to its customers; 
and 

 • employees’ interests and, specifically, 

compliance with the pension deficit repair plan 
agreed with the Pension Trustee in respect of 
the NWPS, as submitted to the Pensions 
Regulator. 

The Company typically pays an interim dividend 
during the year and a final dividend after the year 
end, once the Directors have reviewed the 
financial position of the Company at the balance 
sheet date.

In April 2019, the Board approved the payment of 
a final dividend in respect of the year 2018/19. In 
reaching this decision, the Board took account of 
the Company’s financial position at 31 March 
2019, cumulative financial performance in AMP6 
and Medium Term Plan projections, which 
remained compatible with investment grade 
credit ratings. The Board also took into account 
the principal risks facing the business; good 
performance against most performance 
commitments with no significant service failures 
to customers; positive ongoing employee 
engagement and payments made under the 
schedule of contributions for the NWPS.

No dividends have been proposed, approved or 
paid in respect of the year ended 31 March 2020. 
In deciding this, the Board has taken into account 
the impact of the PR19 FD on the financial 
position of the Company over a five year time 
horizon, especially in relation to the Company’s 
credit ratings and regulatory gearing; the need to 
retain financial resilience in order to be able to 
deliver the Company’s Business Plan 
commitments for stakeholders; and the 
uncertainty associated with the impacts of the 
Covid-19 pandemic on the Company’s future cash 
flows.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
9. INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Cost:

At 1 April 2019

Additions

Transfers

At 31 March 2020

Amortisation:

At 1 April 2019

Charge for the year

At 31 March 2020

Carrying value:

At 31 March 2020

At 31 March 2019

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  126

SOFTWARE 
£’m

ASSETS IN 
DEVELOPMENT 
£’m

97.4

-

33.2

130.6

52.4

9.3

61.7

68.9

45.0

29.7

23.9

(31.9)

21.7

-

-

-

21.7

29.7

TOTAL 
£’m

127.1

23.9

1.3

152.3

52.4

9.3

61.7

90.6

74.7

Cumulative borrowing costs capitalised in the cost of intangible assets amount to £5.2m (2019: £4.0m). 
The capitalisation rate used to determine the amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation was 
4.43% (2019: 4.30%).

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  127

10. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

FREEHOLD 
LAND AND 
BUILDINGS 

£’m

INFRASTRUCTURE 
ASSETS 

OPERATIONAL 
STRUCTURES, 
PLANT AND 
MACHINERY 

£’m

£’m

FIXTURES, 
FITTINGS, 
TOOLS AND 
EQUIPMENT 

£’m

ASSETS IN THE 
COURSE OF 
CONSTRUCTION 

£’m

TOTAL 

£’m

Cost:

At 1 April 2019

158.0

2,877.7

3,044.5

223.4

223.3

6,526.9

Additions

Schemes 
commissioned

Reclassifications

Disposals

At 31 March 
2020

Depreciation:

At 1 April 2019

Charge for the 
year

Disposals

At 31 March 
2020

Carrying value:

At 31 March 2020

At 31 March 2019

3.6

2.4

-

-

13.2

81.7

-

(3.3)

0.3

125.7

(2.1)

(2.4)

-

6.7

0.8

-

239.4

256.5

(216.5)

-

-

-

(1.3)

(5.7)

164.0

2,969.3

3,166.0

230.9

246.2

6,776.4

63.3

4.0

-

67.3

96.7

94.7

407.8

1,416.0

187.5

28.9

(3.3)

93.5

(2.3)

7.6

-

433.4

1,507.2

195.1

-

-

-

-

2,074.6

134.0

(5.6)

2,203.0

2,535.9

1,658.8

2,469.9

1,628.5

35.8

35.9

246.2

4,573.4

223.3

4,452.3

Right of Use Assets included above:

Additions in 
the year

Depreciation 
charge for the 
year

Carrying value at 
31 March 2020

Carrying value at 
31 March 2019

3.6

0.4

3.2

-

-

0.5

43.3

43.8

-

0.7

10.6

11.3

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3.6

1.6

57.1

55.1

Operational structures, plant and machinery include an element of land dedicated to those assets. It is 
not possible to separately identify the value of all land assets.

Cumulative borrowing costs capitalised in the cost of property, plant and equipment amount 
to £55.5m (2019: £46.1m). The capitalisation rate used to determine the amount of borrowing costs 
eligible for capitalisation was 4.43% (2019: 4.30%).

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  128

11. FINANCIAL INVESTMENTS

At 1 April 2019 and 31 March 2020

160.9

LOANS TO GROUP COMPANIES £’m

(a) Loans to Group Companies
In May 2004, the Company made a loan of 
£159.0m to Northumbrian Services Limited, 
maturing in January 2034. Following a 
restructuring of the NWGL group, this loan was 
reassigned to NWGL in March 2016 at a variable 
interest rate of LIBOR plus 1% calculated on twice 
yearly payment dates.

The Boards of NWL and NWGL have agreed to 
settle this loan before its maturity date. It is 
currently envisaged that this legacy 
intercompany loan arrangement will be settled in 
2020.

In May 2004, the Company made a loan of £1.5m 
to Bakethin Holdings Limited, maturing in 
January 2034. The interest on the loan is 
capitalised and at 31 March 2020 the balance was 
£1.9m (2019: £1.9m).

(b) Subsidiaries
The Company’s interests in subsidiaries at 31 March 2020 were as follows: 

NAME OF UNDERTAKING

Northumbrian Water 
Finance plc

COUNTRY OF 
INCORPORATION OR 
REGISTRATION AND 
OPERATION

England and Wales

Reiver Finance Limited

England and Wales

Reiver Holdings Limited

England and Wales

DESCRIPTION OF 
SHARES HELD

Ordinary shares 
of £1

Ordinary shares 
of £1

Ordinary shares 
of £1

PROPORTION OF 
NOMINAL VALUE OF 
ISSUED SHARES HELD 
BY COMPANY (%)

100

100

BUSINESS ACTIVITY

Holding	of	finance	
instruments

Special purpose 
financing	vehicle

100

Holding company

The registered office of all subsidiaries listed 
above is Northumbria House, Abbey Road, Pity 
Me, Durham DH1 5FJ. Holdings are direct other 
than Reiver Finance Limited which is indirect.

The Company also has two quasi-subsidiary 
special purpose entities, Bakethin Holdings 
Limited, which is wholly owned by Bakethin 
Charitable Trust, and Bakethin Finance Plc, 
which is a wholly owned subsidiary of Bakethin 

Holdings Limited. The principal activity of 
Bakethin Finance Plc is as a special purpose 
financing vehicle.

The registered office of the two quasi-subsidiaries 
is c/o Wilmington Trust SP Services (London) 
Limited, Third Floor, 1 King’s Arms Yard, London, 
United Kingdom, EC2R 7AF.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
12. INVENTORIES

Raw materials and consumables

13. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Trade receivables

Doubtful debt provision

Income tax recoverable

Amounts owed by other Group companies

Other receivables

Prepayments and accrued income

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  129

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

4.2

3.6

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

205.2

(104.4)

11.2

2.9

15.7

113.8

244.4

170.2

(85.6)

-

2.9

5.7

89.7

182.9

Amounts owed by other Group companies includes interest of £0.1m (2019: £0.2m) in respect of the 
financial investment of £159.0m in note 11(a). This loan has a variable interest rate of LIBOR plus 1% 
calculated on twice yearly payment dates and matures in January 2034.  The remaining amounts 
owed by other Group companies include £2.4m due from NWG and £0.4m due from fellow subsidiary 
companies, which are due on demand with no fixed repayment date and bear no interest.

14. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES 

Trade payables

Amounts owed to other Group companies

Taxation and social security

Income tax payable

Other payables

Accruals and deferred income

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

29.1

7.4

3.1

-

33.5

96.9

170.0

26.1

11.4

3.5

7.1

34.2

95.4

177.7

Included in amounts owed to other Group companies is £5.9m (2019: £9.7m) payable in respect of tax 
losses surrendered to the Company.  The remaining amount of £1.5m is owed to NWG and is due on 
demand with no fixed repayment date and bears no interest. 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
15. LOANS AND BORROWINGS

Current:

Bank overdrafts

Current instalments due on external borrowings

Current instalments due on leases

Non-current:

Non-current instalments due on external borrowings

Non-current instalments due on internal borrowings

Non-current instalments due on leases

(a) External borrowings
Loans wholly repayable within five years amount to 
£18.6m (2019: £38.6m). 

Loans not wholly repayable within five years amount 
to £520.2m (2019: £538.5m) and bear interest rates in 
the range 1.47% to 5.35%.

The fair value loss on the Company’s outstanding 
interest rate and RPI swaps in the year to 31 March 
2020 was £2.9m (2019: loss of £12.6m) in relation to 
interest rate swaps with a notional principal of 
£350.0m (2019: £350.0m).

(b) Internal borrowings
NWF issued £200m and £150m Guaranteed 
Eurobonds in February 1998 and September 2001 
respectively, maturing February 2023, with an annual 
coupon of 6.875%. The issues were guaranteed by the 
Company who received the issue proceeds by way of 
inter-company loans of £194.2m and £163.2m 
respectively.  Finance costs allocated during the year 
amounted to £0.2m (2019: £0.2m).  Amortisation of 
loan issue receipts during the year amounted to 
£0.3m (2019: £0.3m). 

NWF issued £250m and £100m Guaranteed 
Eurobonds in December 2002 and December 2004, 
maturing April 2033 with an annual coupon of 5.625%. 
Both issues were guaranteed by the Company who 
received the issue proceeds by way of inter-company 
loans of £246.6m and £100.8m respectively.  Finance 
costs allocated during the year amounted to £0.2m 
(2019: £0.2m).

NWF issued £150m Guaranteed Index Linked 
Eurobonds in September 2005, maturing July 2036, 
with a real coupon of 2.033%. The issue was 
guaranteed by the Company who received the issue 
proceeds by way of an inter-company loan of £149.1m. 
Indexation accretion during the year amounted to 
£6.2m (2019: £7.0m). Finance costs allocated during 
the year amounted to £0.2m (2019: £0.2m)

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  130

NOTE

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

15(a)

16

15(a)

15(b)

16

-

36.9

4.4

41.3

501.9

2,355.5

58.6

2,916.0

0.5

46.7

4.0

51.2

530.4

2,237.0

56.9

2,824.3

NWF issued £60m Guaranteed Index Linked 
Eurobonds in January 2006, maturing January 2041, 
with a real coupon of 1.6274%. The issue was 
guaranteed by the Company who received the issue 
proceeds by way of an inter-company loan of 
£60.0m.  Indexation accretion during the year 
amounted to £2.4m (2019: £2.7m).

NWF issued two £100m Guaranteed Index Linked 
Eurobonds in June 2006 with real coupons of 
1.7118% and 1.7484% and with maturities of 2049 and 
2053 respectively. Both issues were guaranteed by 
the Company who received the issue proceeds by 
way of two inter-company loans of £100.0m.  
Indexation accretion during the year amounted to 
£8.1m (2019: £9.1m).

NWF issued £360m Guaranteed Eurobonds in 
January 2012, maturing January 2042, with an 
annual coupon of 5.125%.  The issue was guaranteed 
by the Company who received the issue proceeds 
by way of an inter-company loan of £339.3m. 
Finance costs allocated during the year amounted 
to £0.7m (2019: £0.7m).

NWF issued £300m Guaranteed Eurobonds in 
October 2016, maturing October 2026, with an 
annual coupon of 1.625%. The issue was guaranteed 
by the Company who received the issue proceeds 
by way of an inter-company loan of £297.6m. 
Finance costs allocated during the year amounted 
to £0.2m (2019: £0.2m).

NWF issued £300m Guaranteed Eurobonds in 
October 2017, maturing October 2027, with an 
annual coupon of 2.375%. The issue was guaranteed 
by the Company who received the issue proceeds 
by way of an inter-company loan of £298.2m. 
Finance costs allocated during the year amounted 
to £0.3m (2019: £0.3m).

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  131

15. LOANS AND BORROWINGS (continued) 

NWF issued £100m Guaranteed Index Linked Private Placement notes in October 2019 with a coupon of 
CPI plus 0.242%, maturing October 2039. The issue was guaranteed by the Company who received the 
issue proceeds by way of an inter-company loan of £99.6m.  Indexation accretion during the year 
amounted to £0.5m.

16. LEASES 

(a) Lease obligations under IFRS 16

At 1 April 2019, the Company adopted IFRS 16 and 
has applied the standard retrospectively with the 
cumulative effect recognised at the date of initial 
application (note 1(r)). Prior years have not been 
restated. 

The Company holds leases in respect of land and 
buildings, and to acquire plant, machinery and 
motor vehicles. 

Land and building rent reviews are triggered by 
the lessor and typically take place every 3 to 5 

years, at which point there may be an increase in 
rental payments.  There are no purchase options 
or escalation clauses in respect of these leases 
and the terms of renewal are governed by 
Landlord and Tenant legislation. There are no 
restrictions imposed by these lease 
arrangements. There are no contingent rents, 
escalation clauses or material renewal or 
purchase options. The leases impose no 
restrictions in respect of dividends or raising 
additional debt. The obligations are as follows:

MATURITY ANALYSIS:

2020 £’m

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Year 4

Year 5

Onwards

4.4

3.7

3.0

2.2

1.5

48.2

63.0

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  132

16. LEASES (continued) 

(b) Finance lease and operating lease commitments under IAS 17

Leases previously classified as finance leases under IAS 17:

Future minimum lease payments due:

Within one year

In	the	second	to	fifth	years	inclusive

After	five	years

Less:

Finance charge allocated to future periods

Present value of minimum lease payments

Present value of minimum lease payments:

Within one year

In	the	second	to	fifth	years	inclusive

After	five	years

Leases previously classified as operating leases under IAS 17:

The future minimum rentals payable under non-cancellable operating leases:

Not later than one year

After	one	year	but	not	more	than	five	years

After	five	years

2019 £’m

6.0

18.9

70.9

95.8

(34.9)

60.9

4.0

10.6

46.3

60.9

2019 £’m

0.5

1.0

11.1

12.6

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  133

£’m

1.1

(0.1)

1.0

0.1

0.9

1.0

It is not currently possible to estimate the 
financial effect and likely timing of any 
associated outflow of some matters, given that 
some are in early stages of discussion, the limited 
likelihood of the claims against the Company 
being successful, or the potential range of 
possible outcomes, and accordingly no provision 
has been made in the Financial Statements. No 
reasonably possible financial outcome that would 
be significant to the Financial Statements has 
been identified in relation to these remaining 
matters at the date of the issue of these Financial 
Statements.

17. PROVISIONS 

Pension provision for former employees:

At 1 April 2019

Utilised during the year

At 31 March 2020

Analysed as:

Current

Non-current

The provision mainly represents outstanding 
pension liabilities for pensions that have been 
awarded on a discretionary basis, mainly to 
former employees of water companies which 
have since merged with the Company. These 
pension liabilities have been calculated by an 
independent actuary, using the same actuarial 
assumptions as applied to the defined benefit 
pension scheme, and are expected to be paid  
over the remaining lives, which is approximately 
three years.  

In the ordinary course of business, the Company 
is sometimes subject to claims and potential 
litigation, whether from regulatory bodies, 
individuals or particular groups, related to one off 
matters. The Directors consider that, where it is 
possible to be estimated, a reasonable and 
appropriate position has been taken in reflecting 
such items in these financial statements in note 
14 and the note above.

18. GRANTS AND DEFERRED INCOME 

At 1 April 2019

Additions

Amortised during the year

At 31 March 2020

CAPITAL GRANTS AND 
CONTRIBUTIONS 
£’m

PROCEEDS FROM KIELDER 
SECURITISATION 
£’m

383.6

28.4

(5.5)

406.5

106.7

-

(7.1)

99.6

TOTAL
£’m

490.3

28.4

(12.6)

506.1

The Kielder securitisation involved the assignment of the right to the future income stream associated 
with the Kielder WROA until 2034 to Reiver Finance Limited, a subsidiary company, in return for 
consideration of £212.1m. This capital sum is amortised to the income statement of the Company over 
the life of the assignment.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  134

19. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Financial liabilities / (assets) that are designated and effective as hedging instruments carried at fair value:

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

Interest rate swaps

Power forward contracts

Foreign exchange contracts

Financial liabilities / (assets) carried at fair value through profit and loss:

Interest rate swaps

Power forward contracts

13.2

-

(0.1)

31.0

-

44.1

10.9

1.3

(0.3)

30.4

(0.1)

42.2

At 31 March 2020, the Company held the following interest rate swaps, designated as hedges of future 
interest cash flows, used to convert variable rate interest payments to a fixed rate basis:

NOTIONAL AMOUNT

START DATE

TERMINATION DATE

INDEX LINKED RATE

£100.0m

£150.0m

15 September 2008

15 March 2022

15 October 2015

15 October 2025

4.79%

2.36%

At 31 March 2020, the Company held the following interest rate swaps, designated as hedges of future 
interest cash flows, used to convert fixed rate interest payments to an index linked rate basis:

NOTIONAL AMOUNT

START DATE

TERMINATION DATE

INDEX LINKED RATE

£150.0m

£100.0m

15 October 2015

15 October 2025

22 June 2017

22 June 2027

(0.42%)

(1.10%)

At 31 March 2020, the Company held the following forward exchange contracts, designated as hedges 
of expected future purchases for which the Company has firm commitments. The forward currency 
contracts are being used to hedge the foreign currency risk of the firm commitments. The terms of 
these contracts are as follows:

CURRENCY BOUGHT

MATURITY

EXCHANGE RATE

TRANSACTION VALUE £’m

EUR 2,980

USD 1,245,000

USD 1,240,404

9 April 2020

17 April 2020

30 April 2020

1.0932

1.2620

1.4293

-

1.0

0.8

1.8

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  135

19. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)

At 31 March 2019, the Company held the following forward exchange contracts, designated as hedges 
of expected future purchases for which the Company has firm commitments. The forward currency 
contracts are being used to hedge the foreign currency risk of the firm commitments. The terms of 
these contracts are as follows:

CURRENCY BOUGHT

MATURITY

EXCHANGE RATE

TRANSACTION VALUE £’m

USD 1,245,000

USD 1,112,000

USD 1,245,000

USD 1,240,404

USD 1,240,404

4 April 2019

31 May 2019

13 March 2020

30 April 2019

30 April 2020

1.4550

1.2645

1.4600

1.4069

1.4293

0.9

0.9

0.8

0.9

0.8

4.3

20. SHARE CAPITAL

Authorised:

122,650,000 Ordinary Shares of £1 each (31 March 2019: 
122,650,000)

Allotted, called-up and fully paid:

122,650,000 Ordinary Shares of £1 each (31 March 2019: 
122,650,000)

NWL is a company limited by shares.

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

122.7

122.7

122.7

122.7

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
STRATEGIC REPORT  136

21. ADDITIONAL CASH FLOW INFORMATION

Analysis of net debt as at 31 March 2020

Cash and cash equivalents

Loans receivable

Short term cash deposits

Loans payable

Leases

NOTE

11

15

16(a)

AT 1 APRIL 
2019 
£’m

CASH FLOW 
£’m

OTHER 
NON-CASH 
MOVEMENTS 
£’m

AT  
31 MARCH 
2020 
£’m

(0.5)

160.9

5.0

(2,814.1)

(60.9)

(2,709.6)

5.2

-

22.0

(53.4)

4.3

(21.9)

-

-

-

(26.8)

(6.4)

(33.2)

4.7

160.9

27.0

(2,894.3)

(63.0)

(2,764.7)

Analysis of net debt as at 31 March 2019

Cash and cash equivalents

Loans receivable

Short term cash deposits

Loans payable

Finance leases

AT 1 APRIL 
2018 
£’m

CASH FLOW 
£’m

OTHER 
NON-CASH 
MOVEMENTS 
£’m

AT  
31 MARCH 
2019 
£’m

NOTE

11

2.2

160.9

92.0

15

(2,810.1)

16(b)

(59.5)

(2,614.5)

(2.7)

-

(87.0)

27.5

3.4

(58.8)

-

-

-

(31.5)

(4.8)

(36.3)

(0.5)

160.9

5.0

(2,814.1)

(60.9)

(2,709.6)

22. FINANCIAL COMMITMENTS

(a) Capital commitments

Contractual commitments for the acquisition of property, plant 
and equipment and intangible assets 

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

120.2

145.3

In addition to these commitments, the Company 
has longer term expenditure plans, including 
investment to deliver business outcomes, 
maintain the health of the asset base and provide 
for new demand and growth in the regulated part 
of the business.

(b) Foreign currency commitments
At 31 March 2020 the Company held forward 
foreign exchange contracts of £1.8m (2019: £4.3m) 
for the purpose of hedging the foreign currency 
risk of committed future purchases.

(c) Power purchase agreement
In 2018/19 the Company signed a power purchase 
agreement with Ørsted, to purchase renewable 
energy from an offshore wind farm which will 
meet around 25% of the Company’s energy 
demand. The agreement is for a 10 year term at a 
fixed commodity price, increasing annually by 
CPI.  The Company has concluded that the ‘own 
use exception’ applies, meaning that the power 
purchase agreement contract is not within the 
scope of IFRS 9 and therefore no further 
disclosures are necessary.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  137

Employers’ contributions (including associated 
company contributions) of £30.0m were paid in 
the year to 31 March 2020, of which £12.2m related 
to deficit reduction. For the year to 31 March 2021 
employers contributions are projected to be 
£29.9m, including £12.5m in respect of deficit 
reduction.

Since 1 June 2019, the Company has participated 
in the LifeSight master trust, a defined 
contribution pension arrangement for non-
associated employers. Prior to 1 June 2019, the 
Company contributed to the defined contribution 
section of the NWPS. Defined contribution 
members and assets were transferred from the 
NWPS to LifeSight during 2019. There were 1,989 
active members in defined contribution pension 
arrangements at 31 March 2020 (2019: 1,957). 
Members can choose to contribute either 3%, 4% 
or 5% of salary, with employers contributing at 
either 6%, 7% or 8% depending on the member 
contribution rate.  The contributions paid to 
defined contribution pension arrangements by 
the Company in the year totalled £6.7m (2019: 
£6.0m).

The additional disclosures regarding the defined 
benefit scheme as required under FRS 101 and the 
relevant impact on the Financial Statements are 
set out below. A qualified actuary, using revised 
assumptions that are consistent with the 
requirements of FRS 101 has updated the actuarial 
valuation described above as at 31 March 2020. 
Investments have been valued, for this purpose, at 
fair value.

23. PENSIONS

NWL participates in the Group defined benefit 
pension scheme, NWPS, providing benefits to 1,117 
active members at 31 March 2020 (2019: 1,200). 
The assets of the NWPS are held separately from 
those of the Group in independently administered 
funds.

The most recent actuarial valuation of the NWPS 
was at 31 December 2016. At that date, the value of 
assets amounted to £954.6m and the liabilities 
were £1,245.2m, resulting in a deficit of £290.6m 
and a funding level of 76.7%. The next actuarial 
valuation has commenced and will be dated as at 
31 December 2019.

Under the revised schedule of contributions the 
future service contribution rate, jointly payable by 
members and the employers, remained at 29.4% 
of pensionable salaries until 31 December 2017. 
With effect from 1 January 2018, the employers’ 
contribution was set at £12.3m per annum, 
increasing annually by RPI. Employee 
contribution rates remained at between 6% and 
8% of pensionable salary, dependent upon which 
section of the Scheme the employee is a member 
of. The Company operates a salary sacrifice 
scheme under which members can elect for the 
Company to pay employee contributions on their 
behalf in place of salary. The Company will 
continue to pay the employer NI savings resulting 
from the salary sacrifice arrangement as 
additional employer contributions to the Scheme.

In addition, the employers continue to make 
deficit reduction payments of £11m per annum, 
with effect from 1 April 2015, increasing annually 
by RPI. Deficit reduction payments will increase 
by £2.6m per annum with effect from 1 April 2021. 
The deficit reduction payments have been set 
with the objective of removing the deficit by 31 
March 2031, which has been the Company’s 
long-term aim.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
23. PENSIONS (continued)

FRS 101 ACTUARIAL ASSUMPTIONS:

Discount rate

Pay increases1

Price	inflation	(RPI)

Price	inflation	(CPI)

Pension increases linked to RPI

Pension increases linked to CPI

Mortality assumptions2

- Life expectancy for a member aged 65 - female (years)

- Life expectancy for a member aged 65 - male (years)

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  138

2020

2.35%

3.00%

2.50%

2.00%

2.50%

2.00%

24.2

22.4

2019

2.40%

3.15%

3.15%

2.05%

3.15%

2.05%

23.8

22.0

1. including promotional salary scale 
2. scheme specific bespoke ‘Vitacurves’ which reflect the characteristics of the Scheme membership

The fair value of the assets in the NWPS and the present value of the liabilities in the Scheme are 
shown below: 

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

Equities

Corporate bonds

Government bonds

Property related funds

Cash

Other

Total fair value of assets

Present value of liabilities

Deficit 

218.4

100.0

483.6

47.8

19.5

151.3

1,020.6

(1,104.7)

(84.1)

293.1

47.0

466.5

56.6

15.4

152.2

1,030.8

(1,139.3)

(108.5)

The amounts recognised in the income statement and in the statement of comprehensive income are 
analysed as follows:

RECOGNISED IN THE INCOME STATEMENT:

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

Current service cost

Administration cost

Past service cost

Recognised in operating costs in arriving at operating profit

16.4

2.3

1.5

20.2

15.6

1.9

1.2

18.7

RECOGNISED IN THE INCOME STATEMENT:

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

Net interest cost on plan obligations

Recognised in finance costs

2.3

2.3

2.2

2.2

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  139

23. PENSIONS (continued)

RECOGNISED IN THE STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME:

2020 £’m

2019 £’m

Changes in demographic assumptions

Changes	in	financial	assumptions

Return	on	assets	(excluding	amounts	included	in	finance	costs)

Other actuarial gains / (losses)

Net actuarial gains / (losses)

Contributions made by associated company

Net actuarial gains / (losses)

_

26.2

(12.9)

3.6

16.9

0.1

17.0

21.5

(81.4)

40.0

(0.9)

(20.8)

0.2

(20.6)

Changes in the present value of the defined pension obligations are analysed as follows:

At start of period

Current service cost

Administration cost

Past service cost

Interest cost

Contributions by plan participants

Benefits	paid

Remeasurement:

Changes in demographic assumptions

Changes	in	financial	assumptions

Other actuarial (gains) / losses

2020 £’m

1,139.3

2019 £’m

1,083.6

16.4

2.3

1.5

26.8

0.1

(51.9)

_

(26.2)

(3.6)

15.6

1.9

1.2

28.1

0.1

(52.0)

(21.5)

81.4

0.9

At end of period

1,104.7

1,139.3

Changes in the fair value of plan assets are analysed as follows:

At start of period

Interest income on scheme assets

Contributions by employers (including associated company)

Contributions by plan participants

Benefits	paid

Return	on	assets	(excluding	amounts	included	in	finance	costs)

2020 £’m

1,030.8

24.5

30.0

0.1

(51.9)

(12.9)

2019 £’m

989.3

25.9

27.5

0.1

(52.0)

40.0

At end of period

1,020.6

1,030.8

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
23. PENSIONS (continued)

Nature of benefits, regulatory framework and 
other entity’s responsibilities for governance of 
the Scheme
The Scheme is a registered defined benefit 
scheme subject to the UK regulatory framework 
for pensions, including the scheme specific 
funding requirements. The Scheme is operated 
under trust and as such, the Trustee of the 
Scheme is responsible for operating the Scheme 
and it has a statutory responsibility to act in 
accordance with the Scheme’s Trust Deed and 
Rules, in the best interest of the beneficiaries of 
the Scheme, and UK legislation (including Trust 
law). The Trustee has the power to set the 
contributions that are paid to the Scheme.

Risks to which the Scheme exposes the Company
The nature of the Scheme exposes the Company 
to the risk of paying unanticipated additional 
contributions to the Scheme in times of adverse 
experience. The most financially significant risks 
are likely to be: 

 • members living for longer than expected; 

 • higher than expected actual inflation and 

salary increase experience; 

 •

lower than expected investment returns; and 

 • the risk that movements in the value of the 

Scheme’s liabilities are not met by 
corresponding movements in the value of the 
Scheme’s assets.

Asset-liability matching strategies used by the 
Scheme or the Company 

The Scheme does not currently use any asset-
liability matching strategies. The Trustee’s 
current investment strategy, having consulted 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  140

with the Company, is to invest the majority of the 
Scheme’s assets in a mix of equities and 
corporate and government bonds, in order to 
strike a balance between:

 • maximising the returns on the Scheme’s assets; 

and 

 • minimising the risks associated with lower 

than expected returns on the Scheme’s assets. 

The Trustee is required to regularly review its 
investment strategy in light of the revised term 
and nature of the Scheme’s liabilities. During the 
year, the Trustee chose to de-risk part of its  
equity allocation.

Sensitivity to key assumptions

The costs of a pension arrangement require 
estimates regarding future experience. The 
financial assumptions used for FRS 101 reporting 
are the responsibility of the Directors of the 
Company. These assumptions reflect market 
conditions at the balance sheet date. Changes in 
market conditions which result in changes in the 
net discount rate (essentially the difference 
between the discount rate and the assumed rates 
of increases of salaries, deferred pension 
revaluation or pensions in payment), can have a 
significant effect on the value of the liabilities 
reported.

There has been no change in the methodology 
used to assess the impact of changes in 
assumptions. Approximate adjustments were 
made to the defined benefit obligations reflecting 
the mean term of the liability.

Impact of changes in assumptions compared with actuarial assumption for the NWPS:

Actuarial value of liabilities on 31 March 2020:

0.25% reduction in discount rate

0.25%	increase	in	inflation

1 year increase in life expectancy

£’m

1,155.5

1,151.4

1,143.4

Maturity profile of the defined benefit obligation for the year ended 31 March 2020:

NUMBER OF MEMBERS

LIABILITY SPLIT (%)

DURATION (YEARS)

Active members

Deferred members

Pensioners

1,404

1,193

3,163

41

14

45

24

21

12

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  141

25. ULTIMATE PARENT 
UNDERTAKING AND CONTROLLING 
PARTY

The Company’s immediate parent undertaking is 
NWGL, which is incorporated in England  
and Wales.

The Company has been informed by the former 
ultimate parent and controlling party, CKHH 
(incorporated in the Cayman Islands) that by 
virtue of contractual arrangements entered into 
with other parties, with effect from 30 December 
2019, it ceased to have a controlling interest in 
the Company and, as required by the applicable 
accounting standards, it has ceased accounting 
for the Company as a subsidiary from that date.

The results of the Company prior to 30 December 
2019 are consolidated in the financial statements 
of CKHH. The Directors of the Company consider 
that CKHH was the ultimate parent and 
controlling party of the Company prior to 30 
December 2019.

The Directors of the Company consider that, with 
effect from 30 December 2019, NWGL has become 
the ultimate controlling party of the Company.

The parent undertaking of both the largest and 
smallest group of undertakings for which group 
Financial Statements are drawn up, and of which 
the reporting company is a member, is NWGL. 
Copies of NWGL’s group Financial Statements will 
be available in due course from its registered 
office at Northumbria House, Abbey Road, Pity 
Me, Durham DH1 5FJ.

24. RELATED PARTY DISCLOSURES

The Company is a wholly owned subsidiary of 
NWGL, whose publicly available consolidated 
Financial Statements include the Company. 
Accordingly, the Company is exempt under the 
terms of FRS101 from disclosing transactions 
with other members of the Group headed by 
NWGL.

Transactions with related parties outside of the 
NWGL group comprised purchases of £13.7m 
(2019: £11.4m) and sales of £150.3m (2019: £158.1m).  
As at 31 March 2020 £17.9m (2019: £26.8m) is 
owed from these companies in respect of sales or 
rebates, and £nil (2019: £0.2m) is owed to these 
companies in respect of purchases.  

The Company acquires vehicles from Vehicle 
Lease and Service Limited, an associated 
company, on a lease basis. During the year, new 
leases of £3.3m (2019: £4.8m) were entered into 
and capital repayments of £3.7m (2019: £3.4m) 
were made. The year end lease creditor was 
£11.6m (2019: £12.0m).

The companies with which NWL had 
transactions during the year, included in the 
above balances, were as follows:

 • Anglian Water Business (National) Limited;

 • CKI; 

 • Eastern Power Networks;

 • Hutchison Whampoa (Europe) Limited;

 • NGN;

 • NWG Business;

 • UK Power Networks (Operations) Limited; and

 • Vehicle Lease and Service Limited.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  142

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S 
REPORT TO THE MEMBERS 
OF NORTHUMBRIAN WATER 
LIMITED

REPORT ON THE AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

OPINION

In our opinion the Financial Statements of NWL:

•  give a true and fair view of the state of the 

company’s affairs as at 31 March 2020 and of its 
profit for the year then ended;

The financial reporting framework that has been 
applied in their preparation is applicable law and 
United Kingdom Accounting Standards including 
FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework” (United 
Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting 
Practice). 

•  have been properly prepared in accordance 
with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice including Financial 
Reporting Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure 
Framework”; and

•  have been prepared in accordance with the 
requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

•  We have audited the financial statements 

which comprise:

•  the income statement;

•  the statement of comprehensive income;

•  the balance sheet;

•  the statement of changes in equity; and

•  the related notes 1 to 25.

BASIS FOR OPINION

We conducted our audit in accordance with 
International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs 
(UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities 
under those standards are further described in 
the auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial statements section of our report. 

We are independent of the company in 
accordance with the ethical requirements that 
are relevant to our audit of the financial 
statements in the UK, including the FRC’s Ethical 
Standard, and we have fulfilled our other ethical 
responsibilities in accordance with these 
requirements.  

We believe that the audit evidence we have 
obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a 
basis for our opinion.

SUMMARY OF OUR AUDIT APPROACH 

KEY AUDIT  
MATTERS

The	key	audit	matters	that	we	identified	in	the	current	year	were:

•	 Classification	of	capex,	opex	and	capitalised	overheads;

•	 Provision	for	bad	and	doubtful	debts;

•	 Revenue	recognition	(valuation	of	unbilled	revenue	accrual);and

•  Going concern and impact of Covid-19.

Within	this	report,	key	audit	matters	are	identified	as	follows:					Newly	identified 															

Increased level of risk          Similar level of risk          Decreased level of risk

MATERIALITY

The materiality that we used in the current year was £9.1m which was determined on the basis 
of	profit	before	tax	adjusted	for	movements	in	certain	derivatives	charged	to	the	income 	
statement in the year.

SCOPING

Audit work to respond to the risks of material misstatement was performed directly by the audit 
engagement team.

SIGNIFICANT 
CHANGES IN  
OUR APPROACH

Changes in our approach were limited to adding a new key audit matter in relation to the going 
concern	assumption.	This	is	due	to	the	Covid-19	pandemic	that	has	had	a	significant	impact	on 	
the UK and a number of countries throughout the world.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
CONCLUSIONS RELATING TO GOING CONCERN, PRINCIPAL RISKS AND 
VIABILITY STATEMENT

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  143

GOING 
CONCERN

PRINCIPAL 
RISKS AND 
VIABILITY 
STATEMENT

Going concern is 
the basis of 
preparation of the 
financial 
statements that 
assumes an entity 
will remain in 
operation for a 
period of at least 
12 months from 
the date of 
approval of the 
financial 
statements.

We	confirm	that	we	
have nothing 
material to report, 
add or draw 
attention to in 
respect of these 
matters.

Viability means the 
ability of the 
company to 
continue over the 
time horizon 
considered 
appropriate by the 
directors. 

We	confirm	that	we	
have nothing 
material to report, 
add or draw 
attention to in 
respect of these 
matters.

We	have	reviewed	the	directors’	statement	in	note	1	to	the	financial 	
statements about whether they considered it appropriate to adopt the 
going concern basis of accounting in preparing them and their 
identification	of	any	material	uncertainties	to	the	company’s	ability	to 	
continue to do so over a period of at least twelve months from the 
date	of	approval	of	the	financial	statements.

We considered as part of our risk assessment the nature of the 
company, its business model and related risks including where 
relevant the impact of the Covid-19 pandemic and Brexit, the 
requirements	of	the	applicable	financial	reporting	framework	and	the 	
system of internal control. We evaluated the directors’ assessment of 
the company’s ability to continue as a going concern, including 
challenging the underlying data and key assumptions used to make 
the assessment, and evaluated the directors’ plans for future actions 
in relation to their going concern assessment.

We state whether we have anything material to add or draw attention 
to in relation to that statement that would be required by Listing Rule 
9.8.6R(3) if the company had a premium listing and report if the 
statement is materially inconsistent with our knowledge obtained in 
the audit.

Based solely on reading the directors’ statements and considering 
whether they were consistent with the knowledge we obtained in the 
course of the audit, including the knowledge obtained in the 
evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the company’s ability to 
continue as a going concern, we are required to state whether we 
have anything material to add or draw attention to in relation to:

 • the disclosures on pages 57 to 63 that describe the principal risks, 
procedures to identify emerging risks, and an explanation of how 
these	are	being	managed	or	mitigated;

 • the	directors’	confirmation	on	page 57 that they have carried out a 
robust assessment of the principal and emerging risks facing the 
company, including those that would threaten its business model, 
future	performance,	solvency	or	liquidity;	or

 • the directors’ explanation on pages 102 and 103 as to how they 

have assessed the prospects of the company, over what period they 
have done so and why they consider that period to be appropriate, 
and their statement as to whether they have a reasonable 
expectation that the company will be able to continue in operation 
and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period of their 
assessment, including any related disclosures drawing attention to 
any	necessary	qualifications	or	assumptions. 

We also report whether the directors’ statement relating to the 
prospects of the company that would be required by Listing Rule 
9.8.6R(3) if the company had a premium listing is materially 
inconsistent with our knowledge obtained in the audit.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  144

KEY AUDIT MATTERS

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our 
professional judgement, were of most 
significance in our audit of the financial 
statements of the current period and include the 
most significant assessed risks of material 
misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that 
we identified. These matters included those 

which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit 
strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit; 
and directing the efforts of the engagement team.

These matters were addressed in the context of 
our audit of the financial statements as a whole, 
and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do 
not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

CLASSIFICATION OF CAPEX, OPEX AND CAPITALISED OVERHEADS  

Key audit matter 
description

The water industry is capital intensive and pipeline assets require regular maintenance 
and upgrades. There is an inherent risk in the industry that costs included in property, 
plant and equipment are not capital in nature and/or are not in line with the 
capitalisation criteria of IAS 16. 

Annual capital expenditure across PPE and intangibles spend was £280.4m for the 
year	ended	31	March	2020	(2019:	£269.6m),	together	with	significant	spend	on 	
maintenance costs. 

The	classification	of	expenditure	on	capital	assets	also	includes	the	allocation	of 	
overheads to capitalised amounts, which is judgemental in nature and the amount 
capitalised as intangibles. Given the level of capital expenditure forecast by the 
company	and	the	prior	year	adjustment	in	relation	to	intangible	assets	being	classified 	
to PPE, it is important that appropriate policies are agreed in advance and adhered to. 
The capitalised labour costs were £43.7m for the year to 31 March 2020 (2019: 
£41.0m). 

Given	the	value	involved	in	fixed	asset	additions,	there	being	a	degree	of	complexity	in 	
what can be capitalised and the allocation to either intangible or tangible assets, we 
deemed this as a potential fraud risk for our audit.

Further details are included within the Strategic Report on page 55 and also notes 1(d), 
9	and	10	to	the	financial	statements. 	

How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter

•  We obtained an understanding of management’s relevant controls over the 

processing	of	accounting	entries	associated	with	capital	and	operating	expenditure;

•  We reviewed the appropriateness of the Company’s capitalisation policies and its 
approach	to	determining	which	costs	should	be	capitalised	and	which	expensed; 	

•  We compared the actual capitalised expenditure incurred in the period with 

regulatory targets and make enquiries of management to understand any under/over 
spend;	

•  We performed substantive testing on both capitalised and expensed amounts to 

assess	whether	these	are	classified	in	accordance	with	the	company’s	policies	and 	
IAS	16;

•  We continued to challenge and understand the levels of capitalisation by comparing 

amounts	capitalised	by	department	in	the	current	and	prior	years;

•  We performed testing over the completeness of intangibles and additions to this 

balance	given	the	prior	year	error	noted	in	2019;

•  We tested a sample of capitalised overheads by agreeing to timesheets and project 

plans to assess whether capitalisation was appropriate and there is consistent 
application	of	the	policy	year	on	year;	and

•  We assessed whether any there are impairment indicators or underutilised assets 

exist which would require an impairment to be recognised.

Key observations

The	results	of	our	procedures	were	satisfactory.	We	concluded	that	the	classification	of 	
capex, opex and capitalised overheads are appropriate.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
PROVISION FOR BAD AND DOUBTFUL DEBTS 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  145

Key audit matter 
description

How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter

As stated in the critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation 
uncertainty in note 1(o) of the Annual Report, the value of the bad debt provision is 
calculated by applying a range of percentages to debt of different ages with higher 
percentages applied to different categories of debt depending on an assessment of the 
level	of	risk	of	default.	There	is	a	significant	customer	base,	and	regulations	do	not 	
allow NWL to interrupt water supply to domestic customers. The valuation of the bad 
debt	provision	is	sensitive	to	the	specific	percentages	applied	which	are	judgemental.

At 31 March 2020 the bad debt provision was £101.8m104.4m (2019: £85.6m) and is 
therefore	a	significant	balance.	Of	this	£101.8m104.4m,	we	note	an	increase	of	£6.5m 	
in the current year due to Covid-19 and expected bad debts as a result.

The provision is based on assumptions made on the forecast and historic collectability 
of	debts	across	both	invoiced	amounts	and	accrued	revenues.	There	is	a	significant 	
customer base and regulations do not allow NWL to interrupt water supply to domestic 
customers.	The	provision	for	bad	and	doubtful	debts	is	significantly	large	and	subject 	
to high amount of management judgement and hence we have considered this to be a 
key audit matter. 

Due to the complexity in calculating the provision, particularly in the current year with 
the additional considerations around Covid-19, we deemed this as a potential fraud 
risk for our audit.

Further	details	are	included	within	the	financial	performance	section	of	the	Strategic 	
Report,	note	1(o)	and	13	to	the	financial	statements.

•  We obtained an understanding of management’s relevant controls surrounding the 

estimate;

•  We compared the assumptions made by management in calculating the provision to 

evidence	provided	from	historical	collection	data;

•	 We	tested	any	bad	debt	write	offs	and	utilisation	of	the	provision	during	the	year;

•  We tested the accuracy of the aged debtor balance and the ageing categories 

applied;

•  We assessed the reasonableness of any judgements made in respect of likely future 

events,	including	the	effects	of	Covid-19	on	debt	collectability;

•  We tested a sample of credit notes raised to determine whether any were as a result 

of	an	event	known	but	not	appropriately	provided	for;

•  We tested a sample of bills included within the bad debt provision to assess the 

accuracy	of	the	provision	and	ageing	profile;

•  We compared current and prior year bad debt provision balances to assess 

completeness;

•  We challenged managements assumptions relating to amounts provided in response 

to	Covid-19,	referencing	external	market	information	where	appropriate;

•  We performed sensitivity analysis on the provision to assess the impact of changes 

in	the	cash	collection	rate;	and

•  We reviewed the receivables ageing report to help assess whether overdue debtors 

are appropriately provided for.

Key observations

The results of our procedures were satisfactory. We have concluded that 
management’s judgements are appropriate, including the additional £6.5m provision 
made during the year for Covid-19, and that the provision for bad and doubtful debts 
was appropriately stated.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  146

REVENUE RECOGNITION (VALUATION OF UNBILLED REVENUE ACCRUAL)  

Key audit matter 
description

The nature of NWL’s business is such that it is not possible to read all water meters at 
year-end. An estimate is therefore made of the unbilled revenue at the year-end. At 31 
March 2020 this measured income accrual was £110.3m (2019: £85.8m). 

Management estimates the amount of water and sewerage services that have been 
supplied to customers and not billed at year end, based on historic water consumption 
and default consumption rates. The revenue attributable to this unbilled revenue at 
year end is accrued. The accrual is both material and judgemental and is therefore 
considered to be a key audit matter.

Towards year-end management were unable to physically visit customers’ houses due 
to the UK-wide lockdown and so fewer meter readings were taken than in a normal 
year. The result of this has been a decrease in meter readings of 53,337 in the year, 
taking the percentage of unread metres in the year from 13% to 40% which has 
increased management judgement and estimation included within the balance as at 31 
March 2020 compared to previous periods.

Given the value of the accrual, the quantum of data and the level of estimation involved 
in calculating it, we deemed this as a potential fraud risk for our audit.

Further	details	are	included	within	notes	1(b),	2	and	13	to	the	financial	statements.

•  We obtained an understanding of management’s relevant controls over the unbilled 

revenue	accrual;

•  We performed substantive testing of the accrued revenue calculation and make an 
assessment	of	the	appropriateness	of	accounting	estimates	made	by	management;

•	 We	re-performed	management’s	retrospective	review	on	the	March	2019	balance;

•  We reviewed the accrued revenue balance for any potential recoverability issues by 

tracing	a	sample	to	subsequent	bill	and	cash	payment;	and 	

•  We performed substantive analytical procedures on the year-end balance by forming 

an expectation compared to the prior year. 

How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter

Key observations

The results of our procedures were satisfactory. We concluded that the valuation of the 
unbilled revenue accrual is appropriate and concurred with management on the 
judgements adopted.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  147

GOING CONCERN AND IMPACT OF COVID-19    

Key audit matter 
description

During the year there has been the emergence of a global pandemic of a new strain of 
Coronavirus. The virus, and responses taken by organisations and governments to 
manage its spread in markets to which the company is exposed have led to increased 
volatility and economic disruption. 

Management	have	ensured	that	the	measurement	of	assets	and	liabilities	reflects	only	the 	
conditions that existed at the reporting date and as part of their going concern review 
have	performed	procedures	to	assess	the	financial	and	operational	impacts	of	Covid-19, 	
including:

•  An assessment of operational resilience of NWL, challenging internal control and 

governance, critical business functions ensuring ongoing water supply is maintained 
throughout	the	crisis;

•  An assessment of certain key sources of estimation uncertainty and critical judgements 

such	as	the	bad	debt	provision	as	discussed	above; 	

•  Considerations of solvency and liquidity projections, including an assessment of the 

effects	on	short	term	and	long	term	cash	flow.

In order to fully assess the above, management have made a number of judgements and 
considered a range of factors. Management have also ran an extensive series of 
sensitivity analyses, taking into account a number of outcomes and the potential 
responses to these. Management have placed particular focus on the credit ratings and 
regulatory gearing, as these are relevant to assessing the covenants in the group’s 
financing	arrangements.

From the considerations undertaken, management believes that the company continues 
to be a going concern due to having robust plans in place to manage liquidity in the short 
and longer term as well as the stable solvency position of the wider Northumbrian Water 
Group. 

Management	has	made	disclosures	throughout	the	annual	report	and	financial	statements	
to	reflect	the	results	of	its	assessment,	in	line	with	applicable	accounting	standards,	the 	
company law and corporate governance code provisions. Due to the inherent 
management	judgement	in	the	financial	statement	disclosures,	particularly	those	relating 	
to going concern, and the increased level of audit effort, we considered these to be a key 
audit	matter.	Further	details	are	included	in	note	1a	of	the	financial	statements.

How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter

•	 We	assessed	management’s	projected	cash	flows,	which	include	the	impact	of 	

Covid-19,	and	have	performed	sensitivity	anlaysis;

•  We challenged management’s estimations and judgements used in the forecasting of 

future	cash	flows	used	in	the	assessment	of	the	company’s	liquidity;

•  We obtained an understanding of relevant controls implemented when forecasting cash 

flows;

•  We assessed the operational impact of Covid-19 on the company and have analysed 

management’s assessment of the ability of the company to continue as a going 
concern;

•  We considered whether plans are in place to allow the company to assess whether a 
continued supply of water to customers throughout the impact of the pandemic, 
including	any	emergency	repair	works	required;

•  We reviewed the most recent Board minutes and regulatory correspondence to identify 

items	of	interest;

•	 We	evaluated	management’s	assessment	of	the	impact	of	the	significant	business 	

developments, including the spread of Covid-19 and the resulting actions taken by the 
UK	Government;

•  We evaluated management’s assessment of the impact of recent events on the 
carrying value of the Company’s assets and liabilities including intercompany 
receivables;	and

•	 We	assessed	the	disclosure	made	by	management	in	the	financial	statements.

Key observations

The results of our procedures were satisactory. We concluded that the adoption of the 
going concern basis of accounting and the disclosures related to the potential impact of 
Covid-19 and in respect of the company’s ability to continue as a going concern are 
appropriate.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  148

OUR APPLICATION OF MATERIALITY

We define materiality as the magnitude of 
misstatement in the financial statements that 
makes it probable that the economic decisions of 
a reasonably knowledgeable person would be 
changed or influenced. We use materiality both in 

planning the scope of our audit work and in 
evaluating the results of our work.

Based on our professional judgement, we 
determined materiality for the financial 
statements as a whole as follows:

MATERIALITY

£9.1m (2019: £10.3m)

BASIS FOR DETERMINING 
MATERIALITY

5%	of	adjusted	pre-tax	profit.	This	was	adjusted	to	take	account	of	derivative 	
valuation movements charged to the income statement in the year. This has been 
excluded due to the level of volatility of such derivative valuation movements, in 
order to provide a consistent basis year on year. This approach is also consistent 
with prior year.

RATIONALE FOR THE 
BENCHMARK APPLIED

Adjusted	pre-tax	profit	was	selected	as	the	appropriate	measure	on	which	to 	
determine materiality as it is considered an area of focus for the users of the 
accounts. 

Adjusted PBT £182.2m

Materiality £9.1m

Audit Committee 
reporting  
threshold £0.5m

Performance materiality

Error reporting threshold

We set performance materiality at a level lower 
than materiality to reduce the probability that, in 
aggregate, uncorrected and undetected 
misstatements exceed the materiality for the 
financial statements as a whole. Performance 
materiality was set at 70% of materiality for the 
2020 audit (2019: 70%). In determining 
performance materiality, we considered the low 
number of corrected and uncorrected 
misstatements in the prior years, our cumulative 
knowledge of the company and low turnover 
within management or key accounting personnel

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we 
would report to the Committee all audit 
differences in excess of £0.5m (2019: £0.5m), as 
well as differences below that threshold that, in 
our view, warranted reporting on qualitative 
grounds. We also report to the Audit Committee 
on disclosure matters that we identified when 
assessing the overall presentation of the financial 
statements.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  149

 • Audit committee reporting – the section 

describing the work of the audit committee does 
not appropriately address matters 
communicated by us to the audit committee; or

 • Directors’ statement of compliance with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code – the parts of the 
directors’ statement that would be required if 
the company had a premium listing relating to 
the company’s compliance with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code containing 
provisions specified for review by the auditor in 
accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.10R(2) do not 
properly disclose a departure from a relevant 
provision of the UK Corporate Governance Code. 

We have nothing to report in respect of these 
matters.

RESPONSIBILITIES OF DIRECTORS

As explained more fully in the directors’ 
responsibilities statement, the directors are 
responsible for the preparation of the financial 
statements and for being satisfied that they give a 
true and fair view, and for such internal control as 
the directors determine is necessary to enable the 
preparation of financial statements that are free 
from material misstatement, whether due to fraud 
or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors 
are responsible for assessing the company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing 
as applicable, matters related to going concern 
and using the going concern basis of accounting 
unless the directors either intend to liquidate the 
company or to cease operations, or have no 
realistic alternative but to do so.

AN OVERVIEW OF THE SCOPE OF  
OUR AUDIT  

Scoping 
Our audit was scoped by obtaining an 
understanding of the entity and its environment, 
including internal control, and assessing the 
risks of material misstatement. Audit work to 
respond to the risks of material misstatement 
was performed directly by the audit engagement 
team. 

Our consideration of the control environment 
We involved our IT specialists to assess relevant 
controls over the company’s IT systems. As 
planned and reported to the Audit Committee, we 
adopted a fully substantive testing approach in 
the current and prior years.

OTHER INFORMATION

The directors are responsible for the other 
information. The other information comprises 
the information included in the annual report 
other than the financial statements and our 
auditor’s report thereon.

Our opinion on the financial statements does not 
cover the other information and, except to the 
extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, 
we do not express any form of assurance 
conclusion thereon.

In connection with our audit of the financial 
statements, our responsibility is to read the other 
information and, in doing so, consider whether 
the other information is materially inconsistent 
with the financial statements or our knowledge 
obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be 
materially misstated.

If we identify such material inconsistencies or 
apparent material misstatements, we are required 
to determine whether there is a material 
misstatement in the financial statements or a 
material misstatement of the other information. 
If, based on the work we have performed, we 
conclude that there is a material misstatement of 
this other information, we are required to report 
that fact.

In this context, matters that we are specifically 
required to report to you as uncorrected material 
misstatements of the other information include 
where we conclude that:

 • Fair, balanced and understandable – the 

statement given by the directors that they 
consider the annual report and financial 
statements taken as a whole is fair, balanced 
and understandable and provides the 
information necessary for shareholders to 
assess the company’s position and 
performance, business model and strategy, is 
materially inconsistent with our knowledge 
obtained in the audit; or 

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
AUDITOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR 
THE AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL 
STATEMENTS

MATTERS ON WHICH WE ARE 
REQUIRED TO REPORT BY 
EXCEPTION

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  150

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance 
about whether the financial statements as a 
whole are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an 
auditor’s report that includes our opinion. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level of 
assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit 
conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will 
always detect a material misstatement when it 
exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or 
error and are considered material if, individually 
or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be 
expected to influence the economic decisions of 
users taken on the basis of these financial 
statements.

A further description of our responsibilities for 
the audit of the Financial Statements is located 
on the FRC’s website at:  
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This 
description forms part of our Auditor’s Report.

REPORT ON OTHER LEGAL AND 
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

OPINIONS ON OTHER MATTERS 
PRESCRIBED BY THE COMPANIES 
ACT 2006

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in 
the course of the audit:

 • the information given in the Strategic Report 

and the Directors’ Report for the financial year 
for which the Financial Statements are 
prepared is consistent with the Financial 
Statements; and

 • the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report 

have been prepared in accordance with 
applicable legal requirements.

In the light of the knowledge and understanding 
of the Company and its environment obtained in 
the course of the audit, we have not identified any 
material misstatements in the Strategic Report or 
the Directors’ Report.

Adequacy of explanations received and 
accounting records

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to 
report to you if, in our opinion:

 • we have not received all the information and 

explanations we require for our audit; or

 • adequate accounting records have not been 

kept by the Company, or returns adequate for 
our audit have not been received from branches 
not visited by us; or

 • the Company Financial Statements are not in 
agreement with the accounting records and 
returns.

We have nothing to report in respect of these 
matters.

 • Directors’ remuneration

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also 
required to report if in our opinion certain 
disclosures of Directors’ remuneration have not 
been made.

We have nothing to report in respect of these 
matters.

USE OF OUR REPORT

This report is made solely to the company’s 
members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 
of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit 
work has been undertaken so that we might state 
to the company’s members those matters we are 
required to state to them in an auditor’s report 
and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent 
permitted by law, we do not accept or assume 
responsibility to anyone other than the company 
and the company’s members as a body, for our 
audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we 
have formed.

Anthony Matthews FCA (Senior statutory auditor)

for and on behalf of Deloitte LLP
Statutory Auditor
Newcastle Upon Tyne
United Kingdom
15 July 2020

STATUTORY FINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCE REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
Northumbrian Water Limited 
Northumbria House 
Abbey Road 
Pity Me 
Durham 
DH1 5FJ

www.nwg.co.uk